S-Class - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL S-Class Mercedes-Benz

Front view of a Mercedes-Benz sedan parked on a wet road under a clear blue sky (no visible text or symbols)

S-Class Operator's Manual

S-Class

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
• DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, In
• Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
• BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
• HomeLink ^® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
• iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Burmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
• Microsoft® and Windows media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Siriu XM Radio Inc.
  • HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
• Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
  • ZAGATSurvey ^® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:

WARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.

(▷ page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Display This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND display.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project

http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

^c Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstraße 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or Android™ others. Please n

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow App may not yet be available in your country. instructions is not covered by the Mercedes The technical documentation team at Benz Limited Warranty. Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant

The equipment or product designation of your motoring.

vehicle may vary depending on:

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• design
• equipment
• technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

The following are integral components of the vehicle:

• Operator's Manual
• Maintenance Booklet
  • Equipment-dependent supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner.

You can also use the S-Class Guide smartphone app:

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

Index 4

Introduction 22

At a glance 3

Safety 43

Opening and closing 83

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 109

Lights and windshield wipers ..... 137

Climate control 151

Driving and parking 169

On-board computer and displays .... 247

Stowage and features 315

Maintenance and care 347

Breakdown assistance 363

Wheels and tires 383

Technical data 421

1, 2, 3 ...

115 V socket 329

12 V socket

see Sockets

360° camera

Cleaning 35

Function/notes 230

4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic

Traction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel

drive) 218

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message 266

Function/notes 71

Important safety notes 71

Warning lamp 304

Accident

Automatic measures after an

accident 57

Activating/deactivating cooling

with air dehumidification 156

Activating/deactivating Night

View Assist Plus

With spotlight function 238

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) 261

Display message 290

Function/information ..... 240

Active Body Control (ABC)

Display message 288

Function/notes 214

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) 262

Display message 289

Function/information ..... 243

Active multicontour seat 125

Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces 222

Display message 290

Exiting a parking space 224

Function/notes 221

Important safety notes 221

Parking 223

ADAPTIVE BRAKE 78

Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes 75

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 217

^8 Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message 283

Function/notes 141

Switching on/off 142

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS

Display messages 283

Function/notes 143

Switching on/off 144

Additional speedometer 263

Additives (engine oil) 426

Air bags

Belt bags 63

Cushion air bags 51

Display message 279

Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) 48

Important safety notes 46

Knee bag 49

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp 51

Safety guidelines 45

Side impact air bag 49

Window curtain air bag 50

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

AIRMATIC

Display message 287

Function/notes 216

Air vents

Glove box 167

Important safety notes 166

Rear 167

Setting 166

Setting the center air vents 166

Setting the side air vents 167

Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 81

Switching off (ATA) 81

Switching the function on/off (ATA) 81

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Armrest

Stowage compartment 318

Ashtray 326

Assistance display (on-board

computer) 258

Assistance menu (on-board

computer) 259

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ...... 352

Hiding a service message 352

Notes 352

Resetting the service interval

display 353

Service message 352

Special service requirements 353

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating 81

Function 8 1

Switching off the alarm 81

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating 261

Display message 287

Function/notes 234

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights

Display message 282

see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) 176

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) 175

Automatic headlamp mode 138

Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program 183

Changing gear 182

DIRECT SELECT lever 179

Display message 297

Driving tips 182

Emergency running mode 187

Engaging drive position 180

Engaging neutral 180

Engaging park position

automatically 179

Engaging reverse gear 179

Engaging the park position 179

Kickdown 182

Manual drive program 184

Manual drive program (AMG

vehicles) 185

Overview 179

Problem (malfunction) 187

Program selector button 182

Pulling away 174

Starting the engine 174

Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 183

Transmission position display ..... 181

Transmission positions 181

Automatic transmission

emergency mode 187

B

BAS (Brake Assist System) 71

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes 72

BAS PLUS Q (Brake Assist System

PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Important safety notes 72

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking 87

Important safety notes 87

Replacing 87

Battery (vehicle)

Charging 371

Display message 285

Important safety notes 369

Jump starting 373

Belt

see Seat belts

Belt bag 63

Belt force limiter

Activation 62

Function 62

Blind Spot Assist

see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message 272

Notes 426

Brake force distribution,

electronic

see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Brake lamps

Display message 281

Brakes

ABS 71

Adaptive Brake Assist 75

BAS 71

BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 7

Brake fluid (notes) 426

Display message 266

EBD 78

High-performance brake system .... 197

Hill start assist 175

HOLD function 212

Important safety notes 196

Maintenance 196

Parking brake 192

Riding tips 196

Warning lamp 303

Breakdown

see Flat tire

see Towing away

Buttons on the steering wheel ......

C

California

Important notice for retail customers and lessees 24

Calling up a malfunction

see Display messages

Camera

see 360° camera

Car

see Vehicle

Care

360° camera 358

Carpets 361

Car wash 354

Display 359

Exhaust pipe 359

Exterior lights 357

Gear or selector lever 360

Interior 359

Matte finish 356

Night View Assist Plus 359

Notes 353

Paint 356

Plastic trim 360

Power washer 355

Rear view camera 358

Roof lining 361

Seat belt 361

Seat cover 361

Sensors 358

2 Steering wheel 360

Trim pieces 360

Washing by hand 355

Wheels 356

Windows 357

Wiper blades 357

Wooden trim 360

Car key

see SmartKey

Car wash (care) 354

CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) 256

Center console

Overview 37

Stowage space 317

24 Center console in the rear compartment

Stowage compartment 319

Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) 85

Chauffeur mode

Display message 299

Fully reclined position 121

General notes 117

Installing the head restraint 119

Moving front-passenger seat into the chauffeur position 118

Moving the front-passenger seat into the normal position 120

Removing the head restraint 119

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes 69

Rear doors 69

Children

In the vehicle 63

Restraint systems 63

Special seat belt retractor 66

Child seat

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors 67

Top Tether 68

Cigarette lighter 326

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal 357

Climate control

Automatic climate control 153

Controlling automatically 157

Cooling with air dehumidification .. 156

Defrosting the windows 162

Defrosting the windshield 161

ECO start/stop function 155

Important safety notes 152

Indicator lamp 157

Ionization 166

Notes on using automatic climate control 155

Overview of systems 152

Perfume atomizer 164

Problems with cooling with air dehumidification 157

Problem with the rear window defroster 163

Rear control panel 153

Refrigerant 428

Refrigerant filling capacity 428

Setting the air distribution 160

Setting the airflow 160

Setting the air vents 166

Setting the climate mode 15

Setting the temperature 159

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 163

Switching on/off 155

Switching residual heat on/off ..... 163

Switching the rear window defroster on/off 162

Switching the synchronization function on and off 161

Cockpit

Overview 32

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating the distance warning function 261

Display message 273

Operation/notes 73

COMAND display

Cleaning 359

Combination switch 140

Consumption statistics (on-board computer) 251

Convenience closing feature 100

Convenience opening feature 100

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level 351

Display message 283

Filling capacity 427

Important safety notes 426

Temperature gauge 259

Warning lamp 309

Coolbox 331

Cooling

see Climate control

Copyright 29

Cornering light function

Display message 280

Function/notes 141

Crash-responsive emergency

lighting 145

Crosswind, driving assistance

(vehicles without MAGIC BODY

CONTROL) 77

Crosswind driving assistance

(vehicles with Magic Body

Control) 214

Crosswind driving assistance

(vehicles without MAGIC BODY

CONTROL) 77

Cruise control

Cruise control lever 200

Deactivating 201

Display message 294

Driving system 199

Function/notes 199

Important safety notes 199

Setting a speed 201

Storing and maintaining current

speed 200

Cup holder

Center console 322

Important safety notes 322

Rear compartment 322

Temperature controlled 323

Cushion air bags 51

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 27

Customer Relations Department ..... 27

D

Data

see Technical data

Daytime running lamps

Display message 282

Function/notes 138

Switching on/off (on-board computer) 262

Declarations of conformity 26

Diagnostics connection 26

Digital speedometer 252

DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmission

Display

see Display message see Warning and indicator lamps

Display message

ASSYST PLUS 352

Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 265

Driving systems 287

Engine 283

General notes 265

Hiding (on-board computer) 265

Introduction 265

Lights 28

Safety systems 266

SmartKey 300

Tires 295

Vehicle 297

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 311

Distance warning function

Activating/deactivating 261

Function/notes 73

DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating 203

Activation conditions 203

Cruise control lever 203

Deactivating 208

Display message 292

Displays in the multifunction display. 207

Driving tips 208

Function/notes 201

Important safety notes 202

Setting the specified minimum distance 206

Doors

Automatic locking (switch) 9 2

Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) 8 5

Control panel 40

Display message 298

Emergency locking 93

Emergency unlocking 92

Important safety notes 90

Opening (from inside) 91

Power closing 92

Drinking and driving 194

Drive program

Automatic 183

Manual 184

Manual (AMG vehicles) 185

SETUP (on-board computer) 264

Driver's/front-passenger seat

Stowage compartment 318

Driver's door

see Doors

Driver's seat

see Seats

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service 353

Symmetrical low beam ..... 138

^u Driving Assistance package 240

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ..... 71

ADAPTIVE BRAKE 78

Adaptive Brake Assist 75

BAS (Brake Assist System) 71

BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 7 2

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 73

Distance warning function 73

Electronic brake force distribution ... 78

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 7 6

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction

System) 76

Important safety information 70

Overview 70

PRE-SAFE® Brake 7 8

STEER CONTROL 80

Driving systems

360°camera 230

Active Blind Spot Assist 240

Active Body Control 214

Active Lane Keeping Assist 243

Active Parking Assist 221

AIRMATIC 216

ATTENTION ASSIST 234

Cruise control 199

Display message 287

DISTRONIC PLUS 201

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering

Assist 210

Driving Assistance package 240

HOLD function 212

Night View Assist Plus 236

PARKTRONIC 218

Rear view camera 226

Driving tips

AMG ceramic brakes 197

Automatic transmission 182

Brakes 196

Break-in period 170

DISTRONIC PLUS 208

Downhill gradient 196

Drinking and driving 194

Driving abroad 138

Driving in winter 19

Driving on flooded roads 198

Driving on wet roads 198

Exhaust check 194

Fuel 194

General 193

Hydroplaning 198

Icy road surfaces 198

Limited braking efficiency on

salted roads ..... 196

Snow chains 387

Symmetrical low beam ..... 138

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 170

Wet road surface 196

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 256

E

EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes 129

EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes 129

EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Display message 269

Function/notes 78

ECO display

Function/notes 195

On-board computer 251

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start 176

Automatic engine switch-off 175

Climate control 155

Deactivating/activating 177

General information 175

Important safety notes 175

Introduction 175

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency

Automatic measures after an accident 57

Emergency release

Driver's door 92

Trunk 98

Vehicle 92

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Function 62

Safety guidelines. 45

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 23

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp 308

Display message 283

ECO start/stop function 175

Engine number 423

Irregular running 178

Jump-starting 373

Starting problems 178

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey 174

Starting with the Start/Stop button 174

Switching off 191

Switching off with the Start/Stop

button 191

Switching off with the vehicle key .. 19

Tow-starting (vehicle) 378

Engine electronics

Problem (malfunction) 178

Engine emergency stop 38

Engine oil

Adding 350

Additives 426

Checking the oil level 349

Checking the oil level using the

dipstick 349

Display message 285

Filling capacity 426

Notes about oil grades 425

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 349

Temperature (on-board computer) . 2 6

Viscosity 426

ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 264

Characteristics 76

Deactivating/activating 77

Display message 266

ETS/4ETS 76

Function/notes 76

General notes 76

Important safety information 76

Warning lamp 305

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction

System) 76

Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe

Exhaust check 194

Exhaust pipe

Cleaning 359

Exterior lighting

Cleaning 357

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting 131

Dipping (automatic) 132

Folding in/out (automatically) ..... 131

Folding in/out (electrically) ..... 131

Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 132

Setting 131

Storing settings (memory function) 133

Storing the parking position ..... 132

Eyeglasses compartment 317

F

Features 322

Filler cap

see Fuel filler flap

Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the

spare wheel 407

MOExtended tires 365

Preparing the vehicle 365

TREFIT kit 366

Floormats 344

Folding table 319

Front-passenger seat

Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 114

Adjusting from the rear

compartment 114

Front windshield

see Windshield

Fuel

Additives 425

Consumption statistics 251

Displaying the current

consumption 251

Displaying the range 251

Driving tips 194

Fuel gauge 33

Grade (gasoline) 424

Important safety notes 424

Notes for AMG vehicles 425

Problem (malfunction) 190

Refueling 187

Tank content/reserve fuel 424

Fuel filler flap

Opening 188

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board

computer) 251

Fuel tank

Capacity 424

Problem (malfunction) 190

Fuses

Allocation chart 380

Before changing 379

Dashboard fuse box 379

Engine emergency stop 381

Fuse box in the engine compartment 380

Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell 380

Fuse box in the trunk 380

Important safety notes 379

G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory 344

General notes 341

Important safety notes 341

Opening/closing the garage door .. 344

Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) 342

Gasoline 424

Gear indicator (on-board computer) 264

Genuine parts 22

Glove box 317

H

Handbrake

see Parking brake

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 95

Hazard warning lamps 140

Head bags

Display message 277

Headlamps

Cleaning system (notes) 427

Fogging up 144

see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraint

EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint 122

Head restraints

Adjusting 121

Adjusting (manually) ..... 121

Adjusting (rear) 123

Luxury 122

Supplementary cushion 124

Heating

see Climate control

High beam flasher 140

High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist 141

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 143

Display message 281

Switching on/off 140

Hill start assist 175

HOLD function

Activating 213

Deactivating 213

Display message 292

Function/notes 212

Hood

Closing 349

Display message 298

Important safety notes 348

Opening 348

Hydroplaning 198

|

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer 80

Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. 311

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators

see Turn signals

Instrument cluster

Overview 33

Warning and indicator lamps 34

Instrument cluster lighting 35

Interior lighting 144

Control 145

Emergency lighting 145

Overview 144

Reading lamp 144

J

Jack

Using 409

Jump starting (engine) 373

K

KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature 101

Locking 85

Unlocking 85

Key positions

SmartKey 171

Start/Stop button 171

Kickdown

Driving tips 182

Knee bag 49

L

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors 67

License plate lamp (display message) 281

Light function, active

Display message 282

Lighting

Light switch 138

Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist 141

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 143

Automatic headlamp mode 138

Cornering light function 141

Driving abroad 138

Fogged up headlamps 144

Hazard warning lamps 140

High beam flasher 140

High-beam headlamps 140

Low-beam headlamps 139

Parking lamps 139

Setting exterior lighting 138

Standing lamps 139

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) 262

Switching the spotlight on/off ..... 262

Turn signals 140

see Interior lighting

see Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ..... 282

Loading guidelines 316

Locking

see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic 92

Emergency locking 93

From inside (central locking button) 91

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps

Display message 280

Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) 138

Switching on/off 139

Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support 125

Luxury head restraints 122

M

M+S tires 386

Magic Body Control 213

Malfunction message

see Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 356

MBC

see Magic Body Control

mbrace

Call priority 336

Display message 272

Downloading destinations (COMAND) 337

Downloading routes 340

Emergency call 334

General notes 332

Geo fencing 340

Locating a stolen vehicle 339

MB info call button 336

Remote vehicle locking 338

Roadside Assistance button 335

Search & Send 337

Self-test 333

Speed alert 340

System 333

Triggering the vehicle alarm 341

Vehicle remote malfunction

diagnosis 339

Vehicle remote unlocking 338

Mechanical key

Function/notes 86

Inserting 87

Locking vehicle 93

Removing 86

Unlocking the driver's door 92

Media Interface

see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) 256

Memory function

In the rear compartment 134

Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors 133

Storing settings (rear compartment) 135

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera 230

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 71

Active Blind Spot Assist 240

Active Lane Keeping Assist 243

Active Parking Assist 221

Attention Assist 234

BAS (Brake Assist) 71

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist 72

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 73

Crosswind driving assistance (vehicles with Magic Body Control) 2

Crosswind driving assistance (vehicles without MAGIC BODY CONTROL) 77

Cruise control 199

DISTRONIC PLUS 201

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist 210

ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program) . 7 6

General notes 199

Magic Body Control 213

Night View Assist Plus 236

PARKTRONIC 218

PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection) 56

PRE-SAFE ^® Brake 78

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection PLUS) 56

Rear view camera 226

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 215

Seat belt buckle extender 61

Message memory (on-board

computer) 265

Messages

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mirror turn signal

Cleaning 357

Mobile phone

Menu (on-board computer) 257

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) 86

MOExtended tires 365

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle 412

Mounting a new wheel 411

Preparing the vehicle 408

Raising the vehicle 409

Removing a wheel 411

Securing the vehicle against rolling away 408

MP3

1 Operation 256

Multicontour seat 124

Multifunction display

Function/notes 250 Permanent display 263

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer . 2 4 9 Overview ...... 35

N

Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) 252

Night View Assist Plus

Activating/deactivating 238

Cleaning 359

Display message 291

Function/notes 236

Problem (malfunction) 240

Switching automatic activation

on/off 260

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 170

O

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Faults 55

Operation 5 1

System self-test 54

Occupant safety

Air bags 46

Automatic measures after an accident 57

Children in the vehicle 63

Important safety notes 44

PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection) 56

Seat belt 57

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) 45

OCS

Faults 55

Operation 5 1

System self-test 54

Odometer 250

Oil

see Engine oil

On-board computer

AMG menu 264

Assistance graphic menu 258

Assistance menu 259

Displaying a service message ...... 352

Display messages 265

DISTRONIC PLUS 207

Factory settings 263

Important safety notes 248

Instrument cluster menu 262

Lights menu 262

Media menu 255

Menu overview 250

Message memory 265

Navigation menu 252

Operation 249

Radio menu 254

Service menu 259

Settings menu 259

Standard display ..... 250

Telephone menu 257

Trip menu 250

Video DVD operation 256

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity 26

Important safety notes 25

Operating system

see On-board computer

Operator's Manual

Overview 23

Vehicle equipment 23

Outside temperature display 248

Overhead control panel 39

Override feature

Rear side windows 70

P

Paint code number 422

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 356

Panic alarm 44

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing 103

Problem (malfunction) 107

Resetting 106

Panorama sliding sunroof

Important safety notes 102

Parcel net hooks 320

Parking 190

Important safety notes 190

Parking brake 192

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side 132

Rear view camera 226

see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

Active Parking Assist 221

see Exterior mirrors

see PARKTRONIC

Parking assistance

see PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Display message 269

Electric parking brake 192

Warning lamp 307

Parking lamps

Switching on/off 139

PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating 220

Driving system 218

Function/notes 218

Important safety notes 218

Problem (malfunction) 221

Range of the sensors 219

Warning display 220

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

Problem (malfunction) 55

Problems (malfunction) 279

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp 51

Perfume atomizer

Operating 16

Perfume vial 164

Problem (malfunction) 166

Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 3

Power locks 92

Power washers 355

Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message 272

Operation 56

PRE-SAFE® Brake

Activating/deactivating 260

Display message 273

Function/notes 78

Important safety notes 78

Warning lamp 311

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection PLUS)

Operation 56

Program selector button 182

Protection of the environment

General notes 22

Pulling away

Automatic transmission 174

Hill start assist 175

Q

Qualified specialist workshop ......

R

Radio

Selecting a station 254

Radio-wave reception/

transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity 26

Reading lamp 144

Rear compartment

Activating/deactivating climate control 155

Setting the air distribution 160

Setting the airflow 160

Setting the air vents 167

Setting the temperature 159

Stowage compartment 318

4 Rear lamps

see Lights

Rear seats

1. Adjusting 113

Adjusting a rear reclining seat ..... 113

Overview 41

Setting the reclined position 113

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions 358

Function/notes 226

Switching on/off 227

Rear-view mirror

Anti-glare (manual) 130

Dipping (automatic) 132

Rear window blind 325

Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) 163

Switching on/off 162

Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)

Important safety notes 428

Refueling

Fuel gauge 33

Important safety notes 187

Notes for AMG vehicles 425

Refueling process ..... 188

see Fuel

Remote control

Programming (garage door opener) 342

27Replacing bulbs

General notes 146

Reporting safety defects 27Seat belt extender

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message 286

Warning lamp 308

Residual heat (climate control) ..... 163

Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Reversing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ..... 103

Roller sunblinds 104

Side windows 99

Trunk lid 93

Reversing lamps (display message) 282

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 215Seats

Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel. 104

Rear side windows 324

Rear window 325

Roller sunblind of the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Operating (front roller sunblind) .... 105

Operating (rear roller sunblind) ..... 105

Roof carrier 321

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) 361

Roof load (maximum) 429

s

Safety

Children in the vehicle 63

Child restraint systems 63

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) 51

see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety systems

Seat

Multicontour seat in the rear

compartment 125

Seat belt buckle extender

Display message 274

Important safety notes 61

Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front-

passenger seat belt 60

Adjusting the height 60

Belt force limiters 62

Cleaning 361

Correct usage 58

Emergency Tensioning Devices ...... 6 2

Fastening 59

Important safety guidelines 57

Releasing 60

Safety guidelines 45

Seat belt extender 61

Warning lamp 302

Warning lamp (function) 61

Active multicontour seat ..... 125

Adjusting (electrically) 112

Adjusting (rear compartment) ..... 113

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar

support 125

Adjusting the head restraint 121

Chauffeur mode 117

Cleaning the cover 361

Correct driver's seat position ..... 110

Display message 299

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system 129

Important safety notes 111

Multicontour seat 124

Seat heating 125

Seat heating problem 126

Seat ventilation 126

Seat ventilation problem 127

Storing settings (memory function) 133

Switching seat heating on/off ..... 125

Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 126

Selector lever

Cleaning 360

see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ..... 358

Service menu (on-board computer) . 2 5 9

Service products

Brake fluid 426

Coolant (engine) 426

Engine oil 425

Fuel 423

Important safety notes 423

Refrigerant (air-conditioning

system) 428

Washer fluid 4 2 7

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) 263

On-board computer 259

SETUP (on-board computer) 264SRS (Supplemental Restraint

Side impact air bag 4System)

Side marker lamp (display

message) 282

Side windows

Cleaning 357

Convenience closing feature ..... 100

Convenience opening feature ..... 100

Important safety information 99

Opening/closing 99

Problem (malfunction) 102

Resetting 101

Sliding sunroof

see Panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel

SmartKey

Changing the battery 87

Changing the programming 86

Checking the battery 87

Convenience closing feature ..... 101

Convenience opening feature ..... 100

Display message 300

Door central locking/unlocking ..... 85

Important safety notes 84

Loss 89

Mechanical key 86

Overview 84

Positions (ignition lock) 171

Problem (malfunction) 89

Starting the engine 174

Snow chains 387

Sockets

Center console 328

General notes 328

Rear compartment 328

Trunk 329

Specialist workshop 27

Special seat belt retractor 66

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer 263

Digital 252

In the Instrument cluster 33

Selecting the unit of measurement 262

see Instrument cluster

4SRS (Supplemental Restraint

4System)

Display message 276

Introduction 45

Warning lamp 307

Warning lamp (function) 45

Standing lamps

Display message 282

Switching on/off 139

Start/Stop button

Starting the engine 174

Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) 173

STEER CONTROL 80

Steering

Warning lamps 313

Steering (display message) 299

Steering Assist (DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message 293

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) 127

Button overview 35

Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 249

Cleaning 360

EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature 129

Important safety notes 127

Paddle shifters 183

Steering wheel heating 128

Storing settings (memory function) 133

Steering wheel heating

Problem (malfunction) 129

Switching on/off 128

Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 183

Stowage areas 316

Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) 318

Center console 317

Center console in rear compartment 319

Cup holders 322

Door 318

Eyeglasses compartment 317

Glove box 3 1

Important safety information 316

Rear 318

Rear seat backrest 319

Stowage net 320

Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat 318

Stowage net 320

Stowage space

Folding table 319

Parcel net retainers 320

Securing a load 320

Stowage well beneath the trunk

floor 320

Summer tires

In winter 386

Sun visor 324

Supplemental restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Suspension tuning

Active Body Control 214

AIRMATIC 217

SETUP (on-board computer) 264

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off 163

T

Tachometer 248

Tail lamps

Display message 281

see Lights

Tank content

Fuel gauge 33

Technical data

Capacities 423

Information 422

Tires/wheels 413

Vehicle data 429

Telephone

Accepting a call 257

Display message 300

Introduction 257

Menu (on-board computer) 257

Number from the phone book ...... 2 5 7

Redialing 258

Rejecting/ending a call 257

Temperature

Coolant 259

Engine oil (on-board computer) ..... 264

Outside temperature 2 4 8

Setting (climate control) 159

Theft deterrent systems

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 81

Immobilizer 80

TIREFIT kit 366

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 391

Checking manually 390

Display message 295

Important safety notes 391

Maximum 390

Notes 389

Not reached (TREFIT) 368

Reached (TIREFIT) 368

Recommended 387

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes 394

Important safety notes 394

Restarting 394

Tire pressure monitoring system

Checking the tire pressure

electronically 392

Function/notes 391

General notes 391

Important safety notes 391

Restarting 393

Warning lamp 312

Warning message 393

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) 406

Average weight of the vehicle

occupants (definition) 405

Bar (definition) 404

Changing a wheel 407

Characteristics 404

Checking 385

Definition of terms 404

Direction of rotation. 407

Display message 295

Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) 407 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 4 0 4

DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) 405

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) 405

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) 405

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) 405

Important safety notes 384

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ..... 405

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) 405

Labeling (overview) ..... 401 Load bearing index (definition) ..... 40

Load index 403

Load index (definition) 405

Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) 405

Maximum load on a tire (definition) 406

Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) 406

Maximum tire load 403

Maximum tire load (definition) ..... 406

MOExtended tires 386

Optional equipment weight (definition) 406

PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) 406

Replacing 407

Service life 386

Sidewall (definition) 406

Speed rating (definition) 405

Storing 407

Structure and characteristics (definition) 404

Summer tires in winter 386

Temperature 400

TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) 406

Tire bead (definition) 406

Tire pressure (definition) 406

Tire pressures (recommended) ..... 405

Tire size (data) 413

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating 401

Tire tread 385

Tire tread (definition) 406

Total load limit (definition) 407

Traction 400

Traction (definition) 406

Tread wear 400

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 399

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) 405

Unladen weight (definition) 406

Wear indicator (definition) 406

Wheel and tire combination 415

Wheel rim (definition) 405

see Flat tire o Tether 68

Towing

Important safety guidelines ...... 376

Installing the towing eye 377

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ...... 378

Removing the towing eye 377

With the rear axle raised 377

Towing away

With both axles on the ground ..... 377

Towing eye 364

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting 378

Important safety notes 376

Transfer case 187

Transmission

see Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle 378

Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 3 6 C

Trip computer (on-board computer) 251

Trip meter

see Trip odometer

Trip odometer

Calling up 250

Resetting (on-board computer) ..... 252

Trunk

Emergency release 98

Important safety notes 93

Locking separately 97

Opening/closing (automatically

from inside) 97

Opening/closing (automatically

from outside) 94

Opening/closing (from outside,

HANDS-FREE ACCESS) 95

Opening/closing (manually from

outside) 94

Power closing 92

Trunk lid

Display message 298

Obstacle recognition 93

Opening/closing 93

Opening dimensions 429

Trunk load (maximum) 4

Turn signals

Display message 280

Switching on/off 140

Two-way radio

Windshield (infrared reflective) ..... 345

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

U

Unlocking

Emergency unlocking 92

From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) 91

V

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) .....

Vehicle

Correct use 27

Data acquisition 28

Display message 297

Equipment 23

Individual settings 259

Limited Warranty 28

Loading 395

Locking (in an emergency) 93

Locking (SmartKey) 85

Lowering 412

Maintenance 24

Operating safety 25

Parking for a long period 19

Pulling away 174

Raising 409

Reporting problems 27

Securing from rolling away 408

Towing away 376

Transporting 378

Unlocking (in an emergency) 92

Unlocking (SmartKey) 85

Vehicle data 429

Vehicle data

Roof load (maximum) ..... 429

Trunk load (maximum) 429

Vehicle dimensions 429

Vehicle emergency locking 93

Vehicle identification number

2 9 see VIN

Vehicle identification plate 422

Vehicle level

Active Body Control (ABC) 214

Display message 287, 288

Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit 364

Video

Operating the DVD 256

VIN 422

W

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS 304

Brakes 303

3 2 Check Engine 308

Coolant 309

Distance warning 311

ESP ^® 305

ESP ^® OFF 306

Fuel tank 308

Overview 34

Parking brake 307

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 51

Reserve fuel 308

Seat belt 302

SRS 307

Steering 313

Tire pressure monitor 312

Warranty 23

Washer fluid

Display message 300

Wheel and tire combination

see Tires

Wheel bolt tightening torque 412

Wheel chock 408

Wheels

Changing a wheel 407

Checking 385

Cleaning 356

Important safety notes 384

Interchanging/changing 407

Mounting a new wheel 411

Mounting a wheel 408

Removing a wheel 411

Storing 407

Tightening torque 412

Wheel size/tire size 413

Window curtain air bag

Operation 50

Windows

see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting 161

Infrared reflective 345

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid 351

Notes 427

Windshield wipers

Problem (malfunction) 149

Replacing the wiper blades 147

Switching on/off 146

Winter driving

Important safety notes 386

Slippery road surfaces 198

Snow chains 387

Winter operation

Summer tires 386

Winter tires

M+S tires 386

Wiper blades

Cleaning 357

Important safety notes 147

Replacing 147

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 360

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Protection of the environment

General notes

Environmental note

Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.

The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.

You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors:

• operating conditions of your vehicle
• your personal driving style

You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

• avoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption.
• always make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
• do not carry any unnecessary weight.
• remove roof racks once you no longer need them.
• a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.
• always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

• do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
• do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary.
• drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

• avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

• change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.

• switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
• keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Environmental note

Have a defective high-voltage battery disposed of in an environmentally-responsible manner. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Environmental concerns and recommendations

Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Environmental note

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

Air bags and Emergency Tensioning

Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

• doors
• door pillars
• door sills

• seats

• cockpit

• instrument cluster
• center console

Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and what as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. U only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Ber parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (▷ page 422).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty

The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Emission System Warranty
  • Emission Performance Warranty
  • California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
• State warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and

Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in California

Under California law you may be entitled to replacement of your vehicle or a refund of purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if on more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to report two or more times, and you have directed notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature that category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directed notified us in writing of the need for it repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:

Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance

The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

fix Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)

For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both air your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline

ofimber tin-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or eCustomer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please use the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:

• service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
• unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
• the fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses.

In the USA

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

WARNING

an Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with tohot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.

When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle devi.

• the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road
• you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road
• a heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

^e The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle.

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This

may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the your satisfaction, please discuss the problem requirements of the next emissions test again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or during the main inspection. contact us at one of the following addresses.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially case for work relevant to safety.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

• work relevant to safety
• service and maintenance work
- repair work
• alterations, installation work and modifications
• work on electronic components

Correct use

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain danger. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:

• the safety notes in this manual
• the Technical Data section in this manual
- traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle

In the USA

Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

the Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, vehicle, particularly one that you believe maSW., Washington, DC 20590.

affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recording

This vehicle is capable of recording diagnosis information relating to vehicle operation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle functions.

COMAND/mbrace

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.

For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace (Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed in certain crash or near crash-lik situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• how various systems in your vehicle are operating

• whether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened
• how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and
  • how fast the vehicle is traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent

of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the SRS Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General information

Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Dashboard 32

Instrument cluster 33

Multifunction steering wheel 3

Center console 37

Overhead control panel 39

Door control panel 40

Rear seats 41

Dashboard

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered component labels pointing to the dashboard and steering wheel.

	Function Page
1	Steering wheel paddle shifters 183
2	Combination switch 140
3	Horn
4	Instrument cluster 33
5	DIRECT SELECT lever 179
6	Overhead control panel 39
7	Control panel for: Lowering the rear seat head restraints 123Extending/retracting the rear roller sunblind 325 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 63Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting and the COMAND display
8	Ignition lock 171Start/Stop button 171

	Function Page
9	Climate control systems 152
10	Adjusts the steering wheel 127Steering wheel heating 128
11	Cruise control lever 200
12	Electric parking brake 192
13	Diagnostics connection 26
14	Opens the hood 348
15	Light switch	138
16	Control panel for:Activating Steering Assist 210Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist 243Deactivating PARKTRONIC 218Switching on 360° camera 230Activating Night View Assist 236

Instrument cluster

Displays

① mph 80 100 40 20 160 ② 61°F 123.0 mi 26753 ③ RPM x 1000 R N P D 176°F ④ ⑤ 70% 0 mph

P54.33-2212-31

Function Page

1	Speedometer
2	Multifunction display 250
3	Tachometer	248

Function Page

4	Coolant temperature 259
5	Fuel gauge

Warning and indicator lamps

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF mph 61°F 00 300 123.0 mi 26753 14 13 RPM x 1000 (P) BRAKE PARK R N P D 176°F 0 mph

P54.33-2215-31

	Function Page
1	ABS	304
2	ESP^® OFF	305
	ESP^®	305
3	Turn signal, left	140
4	Low-beamheadlamps 139
5	High-beamheadlamps	140
6	This lamp has no function
7	Parking lamps,license plate andinstrument cluster lighting	139
8	Turn signal, right	140
9	Distance warning	311

	Function Page
10	(P) Electric parking brake (yellow) 307
11	Electric parking brake (red) 307PARK USA only(P) Canada only
12		Check Engine 308
13		Power steering 313
14	Brakes (red) 303BRAKE USA only(I) Canada only
15		Seat belt 302
16		SRS 307
17		Tire pressure monitor 312

Multifunction steering wheel

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered components and dashboard controls

	Function Page
1	Multifunction display 250
2	Sets the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting and the COMAND display
3	COMAND display; see the separate COMAND operating instructions
4	CD and DVD player/ changer; see the separate COMAND operating instructions
5	COMAND controller and buttons; see the separate COMAND operating instructions

	Function Page
6	Rejects or ends a call 257Exits phone book/redial memoryMakes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial memory+ -Adjusts the volumeMuteSwitches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
7	Calls up the main menuSelects a menu/submenu or scrolls through lists 249OKConfirms your selection 249Hiding display messages 265Back 249Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions

Center console

1 2 3 14 15 MEDIA TEL ON RS ECO 16 17 13 12 11 10 NAN RADIO 9 8 7 6 5 4 P68.20-4534-31

	Function Page
1	Switches COMAND on/off (see the separate operating instructions)
2	Adjusts the volume/mute (see the separate operating instructions)
3	ECO ECO start/stop function 177
4	Telephone keypad (see the separate operating instructions)
5	Sets the vehicle level 214, 216
6	Adjusts the suspension settings	214, 216
7	E'S Selects the drive program/program selector button 182M S Selects the drive program/program selector button (AMG vehicles) 182

	Function Page
8	Back button (see the separate operating instructions)
9	Seat adjustment button (see the separate operating instructions)
10	Navigation button (see the separate operating instructions)
11	Radio button (see the separate operating instructions)
12	Hazard warning lamps 140
13	Media button (see the separate operating instructions)
14	Telephone, address book and Internet button (see separate operating instructions)

	Function Page
15	Vehicle and system settings button (see separate operating instructions)
16	COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions)
17	Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions)

Overhead control panel

Labeled diagram of a car interior showing numbered parts with an inset magnified view of the door handle.

	Function Page
1	Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off	144
2	Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 145
3	SOS SOS button (mbrace system)	334
4	Switches the front interior lighting on/off 145
5	Switches the rear interior lighting on/off	145
6	Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off	144
7	MB Info call button (mbrace system) 336
8	Eyeglasses compartment	317

	Function Page
9	Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 103Opens/closes the front roller sunblinds 105
10	Opens/closes the rear roller sunblind 105
11	Buttons for the garage door opener 342
12	Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
13	Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 335

Door control panel

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and brand logo, likely for automotive control or safety instructions.

	Function Page
1	Seat ventilation	126
2	Seat heating	125
3	Adjusts the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat 114
4	M 1 2 3Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 133
5	Adjusts the seats electrically 112
6	Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 131
7	Opens/closes the right side window	99

	Function Page
8	Opens/closes the rear right side window 99
9	Opens/closes the trunk lid 97
10	Override feature for the controls in the rear compartment 70
11	Opens the door 91
12	Unlocks/locks the vehicle 91
13	Opens/closes the rear left side window 99
14	Opens/closes the left side window	99

Rear seats

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)

P91.12-3618-31

Example: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment System

	Function Page
1	DVD player (see the separate operating instructions)
2	Cigarette lighter 326 Socket	328

	Function Page
3	Cup holder 322
4	Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 319
5	Stowage box in the seat backrest 319Coolbox 331

Useful information 44

Panic alarm 44

Occupant safety 44

Children in the vehicle 63

Driving safety systems 70

Theft deterrent locking system ..... 80

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Panic alarm

PANIC ① P80.00-2217-31

▶ To activate: press PANIC button ① for a least one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
▶ To deactivate: press ☐ PANIC button ① again.

or

▶ Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

WARNING

Modifications to the restraint systems could result in them not functioning properly any

more. The restraint systems could then no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do and could fail in the event of an accident or activate unexpectedly, for

the example. There is an increased risk of injury.

Never modify parts of the restraint systems.

Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as may electronic components or their software.

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.

USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle.

The restraint system consists of:

• Seat belts
  • Child restraint systems
• LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system

Additional protection is provided by:

• SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
- PRE-SAFE®

• Air bag system components with:

• PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
• Front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle as well as restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 63).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) There is a malfunction if:

Introduction

SRS consists of:

• The SRS warning lamp
- Air bags
• The air bag control unit with crash sensors
• Emergency Tensioning Devices
- Seat belt force limiter

SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

WARNING

If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.

The SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started.

The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 🐘 SRS indicator lamp goes out while the engine is running.

• the SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on
• the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp does not go out after a fe seconds
  the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) he and air bags

WARNING

• Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
  • Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

- Air bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated reversible belt tensioners in addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.

- Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

- Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts.

- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

- No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS.

- Do not change or remove any component or part of the SRS.

- Do not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. to the:

- padded steering wheel boss

- knee bag covers

- front-passenger air bag cover

- outer side of front seat bolsters

- side trim next to the rear seat backrest

- roof lining trim

- Do not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring.

- Keep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

- Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag deployed.

• Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them

- Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

- Improper repair work on the SRS creates risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

- For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

- Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

The air bag installation locations are identified by the AIR BAG symbol.

WARNING

Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as in they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system is could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

teYou should only use seat covers that have mbeen approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, the side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident.

WARNING

The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the deployed air bags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:

• frontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and driver's knee bag)
• side impacts (side impact air bags and window curtain air bags)
• rollover (window curtain air bags)

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

WARNING

In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body.

As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it inflates with great force instantaneously:

• sit with the seat belt fastened correctly and in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the backrest.
• move the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
• only hold the steering wheel on the outside. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag inflates.
• adjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.
  • occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious or fatal injuries should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual.

After an air bag has been deployed, have the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is ready to drive.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear bang, and a small amount of powder may be released. Only in rare cases will the bag affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that this is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do. You can also open the window to allow fire to enter the vehicle interior. The warning lamp lights up.

The air bags are deployed if the air bag co-unit detects the need for deployment. Only the event of such a situation will the air be provide their supplemental protection.

If the driver and front passenger do not with their seat belts, it is not possible for the a bags to provide their supplemental protection.

In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.

Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belt. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not.

It is important for your safety and that of passenger to have deployed air bags replac and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the a bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

Front air bags

also ng here use t out so. esh ① ② P91.60-4382-31

SRS Driver's air bag ① deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air control bag ② deploys in front of and above the glove in box.

The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front passenger's head and ear chest.

They are deployed:

- at the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction

- if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

• independently of other air bags in the vehicle

The release time of the front air bags is dependent upon the use of the seat belt. If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are generally not deployed.

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag your control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.

The front air bag is fully deployed if a second

deployment threshold is exceeded within a always deployed along with the driver's front few milliseconds. air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to

The deployment of the front-passenger front air bag is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (▷ page 51). operate together with the front air bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts.

The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the driver's knee bag increases protection higher the vehicle deceleration rate required the driver against:

(predicted at the start of the impact) for • knee injuries second-stage inflation of the front-passenger • thigh injuries front air bag. In the second stage, the front • lower leg injuries air bags are inflated with the maximum

amount of propellant gas available.

The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by fastened seat belt.

The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if:

• the system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied
• the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console is not lit (▷ page 51)
• the air bag control unit predicts a high impact severity

Driver's knee bag

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 46)

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Driver's knee bag ① deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is

• knee injuries
  • thigh injuries
• lower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

WARNING

Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING

Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz. The seat covers must have a special Side impact air bags will not deploy in side tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, impacts which do not exceed the system's the side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident.

Interior view of a car showing two seats with numbered labels (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Front side impact air bags ① and rear side impact air bags ② deploy next to the outer seat cushions.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the:

• head
• neck
• arms

The side impact air bags are deployed:

• on the side on which an impact occurs
- at the start of an accident with a high of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
• independently of the use of the seat be
• independently of the front air bags
• independently of the ETDs

If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. Side impact air bags are deployed if the system detects

high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in lateral direction and determines that side impact air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt.

preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

1 P91.60-4385-31

Window curtain air bags ① enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.

The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

Window curtain air bags are deployed:

at the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact

• on the side on which an impact occurs
• on the driver's and the front passenger's side if the vehicle rolls over and the system determines that window curtain air bag
• at deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt
  a independently of the use of the seat belt
• regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
  • independently of the front air bags

Window curtain air bags will not deploy in the event of impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Cushion air bags

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 46).
When installing a child restraint system, please observe the "Child restraint systems" section (▷ page 63).

WARNING

If a child restraint system is installed and the seat backrest is reclined too far backwards, the cushion air bag may deploy by mistake in the event of an accident. There is an increase risk of injury.

When using a child restraint system, always ensure that the seat is correctly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical.

The rear reclining seat is equipped with a cushion air bag. If the seat backrest is reclined, the cushion air bag can provide additional occupant protection in the event a frontal collision. When triggered, the cushion air bag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the occupant from slipping off the seat cushion.

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Method of operation

WARNING

If the ☒PASS, OUT indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the ☒PASS, OFF indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag.

the deployment when the OCS has classified the front passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is classified as being empty.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the PASS AIR BAG indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started. Depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, it will then remain illuminated or go out. With the indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then go out. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is activated.

If the ×2 PASS, indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.

If the ☒2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed

• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if the impact exceeds a predetermined triggering threshold
- independent of the side impact air bag or pelvis air bag

If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by

• the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
• the front passenger's weight category as identified by the OCS

WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:

- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat.

- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.

- If you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the

PASS OFF AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure that the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. If the

indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates.

- If you place a child in a forward-facing ch restraint on the front-passenger seat:

- move the seat as far back as possible

- use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions

- For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON OFF ② ①

Safety

WARNING

If the red 🙏 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the 🚫 PASS AIR RACT OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Only have the seat repaired or replaced at authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the bag system and OCS:

- Sit with the seat belt properly fastened in position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.

- When seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category.

- Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.

① PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
② PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① does not light up.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ② is inoperative. It lights up briefly when the ignition is switched on and then goes out again.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① shows you the current status. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled.

The system does not deactivate:

• the side impact air bag

• the window curtain air bag

in the Emergency Tensioning Devices

To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit:

• with the seat belt fastened correctly
- in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest
• with their feet on the floor

The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by leaning on the armrest.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the

necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag display messages that can be displayed in the instrument cluster (▷ page 279).

the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside and rear side child restraint system must be placed entirely on the seat cushion and the backrest of the front-passenger seat backrest.

If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger seat backrest.

An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for he installation of child restraint systems.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does no the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp mean that the front-passenger front air baglights up:

will also deploy.

The OCS may have detected that the seat:

• is empty or occupied by the weight of a typical child up to twelve months old, seated in a child restraint system.
  • is occupied by a small individual, such as young teenager or a small adult.
• is occupied by a child in a child restrain system whose weight is greater than that of a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCS

deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.

For further information, see "Air bag display messages" (▷ page 279).

• if the Start/Stop button is pressed once or twice
  or
• if you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2
  • an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
  occupant as an adult The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out again after approximately six seconds.

If the seat is not occupied and the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will continue to light up. The

/PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will not go out.

For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (▷ page 55).

System self-test

WARNING

If the ☒2 PASS AIR BAD OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces

Problems with the occupant classification system

WARNING

If the 2 PASS FOR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

WARNING

If the ☐2 ☐MOS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lights up and remains on.The person on the front-passenger seat:has the weight of a typical adulthas been determined by the system not to be a child	The OCS is malfunctioning.Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▷ page 279).

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or stays on.The front-passenger seat is:unoccupiedoccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and child seat.Check the installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight the seat.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains of the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▷ page 279).

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE ^® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in footwell or behind the seats when resetti the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:

- in emergency braking situations, e.g. when(> page 60).

BAS is activated.

- in critical driving situations, e.g. when (physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely.

- vehicles with the Driving Assistance

package: when a driver assistance syste intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:

- the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

- if the vehicle skids, the panorama roof w power tilt/sliding panel and the side windows are closed so that only a small remains.

- the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.

- vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats: the outer rear seats are adjusted if they are in an unfavorable position.

- vehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the backrest is increased.

- vehicles with seat belt extenders: the seat belts of the outer rear seats are pre-tensioned.

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE blackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.

If the seat belts are not released:

▶ When the vehicle is stationary, move the backrest or seat back slightly. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about seat-belt adjustment can be found under "Seat-belt adjustment"

More information about PRE-SAFEPLUS (▷ page 56).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory moccupant protection system PLUS)

General information

PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.

Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain

hazardous situations, PRE-SAFEPLUS takes with pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFEPLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision.

The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene:

• if the vehicle is backing up
• when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear-end collision

PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking actions while the vehicle is in motion or Parking Guidance is active.

Function

PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:

• If the radar sensor system detects that head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
• If the radar sensor system detects that rear-end collision is imminent:

- the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.

The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled in the following situations:

• if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged
• if the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected
• if DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored.

Automatic measures after an accident

Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact:

• by activating the hazard warning lamps
• the emergency lighting is activated
- the vehicle doors are unlocked
- the front side windows are lowered

- the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised

• the engine is switched off

- vehicles with seat belt extenders: the seat-belt buckles for the outer rear seats are illuminated and extend forwards

- vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call

- vehicles with the hybrid drive system: the hybrid system is deactivated

Seat belts

Important safety notes

WARNING

Objects next to the front seat that block the belt buckle or the moving belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. The Emergency Tensioning Devices may not function as intended and the seat belt may no longer provide the intended protection. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the belt buckle or between the front seat and door.

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck

injuries, for example. This poses an increased Correct use of the seat belts

risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in the upright position.

WARNING

Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:

• they are damaged, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
- the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
- the Emergency Tensioning Devices or the belt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accident may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:

• all 50 states
  • the U.S. territories
  • the District of Columbia
  • all Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

See "Children in the vehicle"

(▷ page 63) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems.

WARNING

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

• Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident.
  • Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs).

- Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet.

- Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries a crash.

• Never wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries.
• Make sure the seat belt is always routed snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.
• Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat around a person and another person or other objects at the same time.
• Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In crash, you would not have the full width the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries.
• Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible of the hips to avoid any possible pressure of the abdomen.
• Place the seat backrest in a position that as upright as possible.
• Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned.
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
• When using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING

Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. could tear.

Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.

inFastening seat belts

WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the d'Children in the vehicle" section.

of A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Diagram of car seatbelt components with numbered labels for identification

▶ Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (▷ page 110).
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide ①.
▶Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis.

▶ Engage belt tongue ② in buckle ③. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (▷ page 60).
▶ If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (▷ page 60).
▶ If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information on the "Special seat belt retractor" (▶ page 66).

Information on releasing the seat belt with release button ④(▷ page 60).

Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

• you engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
• the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it adjusting. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the separate COMAND operating instructions.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE®(▷ page 56).

Belt height adjustment

1 P91.40-3310-31

You can adjust the seat belt height on the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the center of your shoulder.

▶ To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions.
▶ To lower: press and hold belt sash guide the release ①.
▶ Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
▶ Release belt sash guide release ① and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged.

Releasing seat belts

Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

① ② ③ ④ P91.40-3309-31

▶ Press release button ④ on belt buckle
▶ Guide belt tongue ② to belt sash guide ①.

Seat belt extender

General information

The seat belt extender is used on the out rear seats. As the height can be adjusted automatically, it offers various comfort and safety functions.

Important safety notes

Ensure that no objects impair the movement of the seat belt buckle.

Function

To assist you in finding and fastening the belt buckle:

• the belt buckle moves forwards to a convenient position
  • the belt buckle is illuminated

i After fastening, the belt buckle returns its normal position. The seat belt is therefore no longer loose over the lap or thorax.

Incorporation into the PRE-SA System:

The belt buckle is quickly lowered in hazardous situations to pre-tension the seat warning tone is reactivated and the 备 seat belt.

Incorporation into the measures after an accident:

If a rear door is opened after an accident,

• the belt buckle moves forwards
• the belt buckle is illuminated

Belt warning for the driver and from passenger

Safety

Regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have already fastened their seat belts.

③. the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after a maximum of six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If after six seconds, the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed:

- the seat belt warning lamp remains lit as long as the driver's or front-passenger's seat belt is not fastened and

nt if a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is exceeded, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of seat0 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again.

The warning tone ceases even if the driver or front-passenger seat belt has still not been fastened after 60 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated.

After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the

belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle ETDs do not correct incorrect seat speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.

The seat belt warning lamp only goes The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back out if: towards the backrest.

• both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. or
  • the vehicle is stationary and a door is o

For more information on the seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (▷ page 302).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters

WARNING

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in the event an accident the different stages of the Emergency Tensioning Devices could be triggered.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trigger the tightening of the seat belt hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible.

The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters.

The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accide pulling them close against the body.

If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced.

When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant.

The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This results in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area.

The ETDs can only be activated when:

• the ignition is switched on
- the restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (▷ page 45)
- the front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side
- the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts in front

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.

The various stages of the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident:

- in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact.

- in the event of a side impact if the vehicle ts decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite to the impact.

- in certain situations where the vehicle rolls over if the system determines that it can provide additional protection.

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a triggered, the belt bags open, increasing the and a small amount of powder may also be protected area of the occupants' ribcages.

released. Only in rare cases will the bang

affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do. You can also open the window to allow fr air to enter the vehicle interior. The warning lamp lights up.

Belt bags

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 46).

WARNING

In an accident, the belt bag may damage a non-approved child restraint system. As a result, the child restraint system may not be able to provide the intended level of protection. There is an increased risk of injury.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use a child restraint system which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt bag.

i Further information on child restraint systems (▷ page 63).

Interior view of a car showing three white leather seats with numbered labels (1) pointing to different seat positions, no text or symbols present.

The rear seat belts are equipped with belt bags ①. These are triggered depending on the type and severity of the accident. When

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

out WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear SRSating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:

- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.

- For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger

front air bag may or may not be activated. ⚠️ WARNING

Always make sure the 2 PASS AIR SAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the fro passenger front air bag is deactivated.

- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passeng front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in a backse

- If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure the ☒PASS AIRBAG OUT indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Should the ☒ Pass, Off indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.

Periodically check the 📋₂ PASS AIR BAG indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 📋₂ PASS AIR BAG indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 📋₂ PASS AIR BAG indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passeng front air bag inflates.

- If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

WARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint

system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

WARNING

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the eve of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the restraint.

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Children that are too large for a child restra must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not the face or neck. A boost seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a la shoulder belt fits properly without a booster seat.

When the child restraint is not in use, remor it from the vehicle or secure it with the sea belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

WARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.

Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:

• release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
• Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:

• Secure the child with a child or infant seat, restraint system appropriate to the age and weight of the child.
• Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always properly secure all infants and children with a child or infant seat restraint system for the trip.

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:

• all 50 states
  • the U.S. territories
  • the District of Columbia
  • all Canadian provinces

Infants and children must always be seated Special seat belt retractor

an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All infant or child restraint systems must the following standards:

• U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
• Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are system. This confirmation can also be found equipped with a special seat belt retractor.

in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint.

Vehicles with seat belt extenders: when securing a child in a child restraint system a rear seat, observe the following instructions:

• make sure that the seat belt on the child restraint system is fastened according to 'the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system.

- for child restraint systems with a belt clamp: engage the belt tongue in the buck before you tighten the seat belt using the belt clamp.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: whentake up any slack.

installing a child restraint system, move the rear reclining seat backrest to a nearly upright position. The rear reclining seat backrest must rest against the child restraint system. Observe the notes on the cushion air bag (▷ page 51).

WARNING

If you release the seat belt when driving, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

The released seat belt cannot be engaged again while driving, because the inertia reel pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The child restraint system is no longer properly secured. There is an increased risk of serious injury or even fatal injury.

Always keep the seat belt of the activated special seat belt retractor engaged when driving.

When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured.

Installing a child restraint system:

▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor.

▶ Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

▶ Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should cklear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated.

▶ Push down on the child restraint system to entake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor:

▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Vehicles with a rear reclining seat:

in the rear

WARNING

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. Before every trip, make sure that the LATC type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)

child restraint system, make sure that the Never adjust the seat after installing the child seat belt for the center seat does not get restraint system. trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. L

① ② P91.12-3619-31

adjust the rear reclining seat backrest down a little before installing the LATCH type (ISOFIX) child restraint system. ▶ Remove upholstered lining ①.

▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ②.

▶ Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: move the rear reclining seat backrest to an upright position. The rear reclining seat backrest must rest against the child restraint system.

WARNING

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats:

If you adjust the seat after installing a child restraint system:

• the seat belt could slacken or become too tight
  • the child restraint system could become H- loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged As a result, the child restraint system may not be able to provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Never adjust the seat after installing the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ② for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats.

Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ② for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessible.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ② on the Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may rear seats are covered by a Velcro-fastened also be used and can be installed using the upholstered lining ①. vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child

seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

WARNING

If the rear seat backrests are not locked, the could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are positioned vertically.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats: If you adjust the seat after installing a child restraint system:

• the seat belt could slacken or become too tight
• the child restraint system could become loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint system may be able to provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Never adjust the seat after installing the child restraint system.

n nt, sk ① POTENER P91.12-36-20-31

Top Tether anchorage points ① are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf.

▶ Move head restraint upwards (▷ page 113).
▶ Fold up cover ① of Top Tether anchorage.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 2, 3, and 4

P91.20-2338-31

▶ Route Top Tether belt ④ under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars.
▶ Hook Top Tether hook ③ into Top Tether anchorage ②.
▶ Make sure that Top Tether belt ④ is not twisted.
▶ Fold down cover ① of Top Tether anchorage.
▶Move head restraint back down again not slightly if necessary (▶page 123).

Make sure that you do not interfere with correct routing of Top Tether belt ④.

▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt ④ is tight.

the WARNING

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could:

• open doors, thus endangering other people or road users
• exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:

• release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
• Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can activate the following child-proof locks:

• rear doors (▷ page 69)
• rear side windows (▷ page 70)

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

WARNING

Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks.

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the

vehicle is unlocked, the door can be open from the outside.

▶ To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.
▶ To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ②.

Override feature for the rear side windows

WARNING

When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats activate the override switch. Otherwise, the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window.

Car interior control panel with numbered indicator lights and a highlighted section showing two labeled buttons

▶ To activate/deactivate: press button ② If indicator lamp ① is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ① is off, operation is possible using the switches the rear compartment.

For the rear compartment, you can deactivate operation of:

• the rear side windows
- adjustment of the front-passenger seat from the rear compartment
- the sunblinds:

• in the roof
• of the rear window
• of the rear side windows

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:

• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (▷ page 71)
• BAS (Brake Assist System) (▷ page 71)
- BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (▷ page 72)
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (▷ page 73)
^5 ESP ^ (Electronic Stability Program) (▷ page 76)
- EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (▷ page 78)
• ADAPTIVE BRAKE (▷ page 78)
- PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 78)
• STEER CONTROL (▷ page 80)

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics.

Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (▷ page 384).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,

snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the in vehicle when braking. The ABS warning lamp in the instrument while driving. cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running.

Braking

▶ If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
▶ To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel any pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (▷ page 304) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (▷ page 266).

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information

BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" or section (▷ page 70).

WARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

the Braking

▶ Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.

For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational.

With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:

• that are in the path of your vehicle for extended period of time
• that cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.

BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright.

If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BA

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section" (▷ page 72).

BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.

Important safety notes

WARNING

BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, BAS PLUS may:

• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

the WARNING

BAS PLUS does not react:

• to small people, e.g. children
- to animals
• to oncoming vehicles

• when cornering

As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.

Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of:

- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

3.interference by other radar sources

• strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages

- a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike

- a vehicle traveling in front on a different line - vehicles quickly moving into the radar - sensor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of:

• dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered

• glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky

• darkness

• if:

• pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

• the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects
• a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
• the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to B collisions at low speeds where there is no f visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Following damage to the windshield, have configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS reacts to:

• stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
  • pedestrians in the path of your vehicle • objects crossing your path

If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously.

▶ Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if:

• you release the brake pedal.
  ne there is no longer a risk of collision.
• no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
• you depress the accelerator pedal.
• you activate kickdown.

To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if:

• you approach an obstacle, and
  • BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision

When driving at a speed under 20 mp

(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment.

When driving at a speed above 20 mp

(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation.

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notes

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance warning function, which are described in the following.

Distance warning function

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section. (▷ page 70).

WARNING

The distance warning function does not react:

• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering

Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

WARNING

The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, the distance warning function may:

• give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the dista warning function.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:

• dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
  • there is snow or heavy rain
• there is interference by other radar sources
• there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
• a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
• a vehicle traveling in front on a different relative to the center of your vehicle
• new vehicles or after the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST system has been serviced

Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (▷ page 170).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Function

▶ To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (▷ page 261).

If the distance warning function is not activated, the OFF symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.

The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. The distance warning function cannot prevent a collision without your intervention.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the ▲ distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

▶ Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or

Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning.

With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:

• intervene unnecessarily
• not intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:

• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
• to stationary obstacles
- when cornering

As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particula complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.

If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is:

• dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
  • there is snow or heavy rain

• there is interference by other radar source

• there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages

• a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
• a vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle
• new vehicles after the first few kilometers of driving or after the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST system has been serviced
  Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (▷ page 170).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking during hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic situation.

With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.

Should you approach an obstacle and Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply the brakes vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.

Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:

• you release the brake pedal.
• there is no longer any danger of a collision.
• no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Top to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable

of reacting to moving objects that have already been recognized as such at least over the period of observation. Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to stationary obstacles.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires at the road surface.

If ESP ^ detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, or or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified keep the vehicle on the desired course with physical limits. ESP ^ assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surface for example if the road surface is slippery one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have E ^® checked at a once qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the ignition when the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Application of the brakes by ESR may otherwise destroy the brake system.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP®(▷ page 377) when towing the vehicle with a raised rear axle.

ESP® is deactivated if the OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and continuously when the engine is running.

If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP ^ is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps (▷ page 305) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (▷ page 266).

g i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESRunction properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information

If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESPis automatically active.

If ESP ^ intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP® intervenes:

▶ Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.

▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function

The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESPa the on-board computer.

▶ To deactivate:(▷ page 77).

The ☐ ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

▶ To activate: (▷ page 77).

The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

Characteristics when ESRs deactivated

If ESP ^ is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the [IMAGE] ESPWarning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP ^ will not stabilize the vehicle.

You can select between the following states if you deactivate ESP.

of ESP®:

• ESP® is activated.
• ESP® is deactivated.

WARNING

If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP the following situations:

• when using snow chains
• in deep snow
• on sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESPill otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated.

You could otherwise damage the drivetrain

• ESP® no longer improves driving stability.
• engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin.
  The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.
• traction control is still activated.
• ESP® still provides support when you brake.

Crosswind driving assistance

General information

Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL:

information on stabilizing the vehicle in the event of crosswind (▷ page 213).

Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into ESP® significantly reduces these effects.

ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle.

ESP stabilities the vehicle with braking interventions to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.

Crosswind driving assistance is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h)

when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notes

Crosswind driving assistance does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

General information

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

WARNING

If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels cap still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (▷ page 304) as well as display messages (▷ page 269).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (▷ page 212) and hill start assist (▷ page 175).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Pay attention to the important safety of notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (▷ page 70).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational.

With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.

PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section" (▷ page 78).

PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking.

Important safety notes

WARNING

PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

WARNING

PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions.

In these cases, PRE-SAPEBrake may:

• give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
  • not give a warning or intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. As a result, PRE-SAFEBrake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.

Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of:

• dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
  • interference by other radar sources
  • strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
• a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
• a vehicle traveling in front on a different line

In order to maintain the appropriate distance relative to the center of your vehicle to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a Recognition by the camera system is also collision, you must apply the brakes yourself impaired in the event of:

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions:

• the driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and
• the vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFEBrake can also detect:

• stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
  • pedestrians in the path of your vehicle

WARNING

PRE-SAFE ^® Brake does not react:

• to small people, e.g. children
- to animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering

• dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
• glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky
• darkness

- if:

• pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle
• the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects
• a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
• the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera

system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function

▶ To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (▷ page 260). If the PRE-SAFEBrake is not activated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

▶ Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or

▶ Take evasive action provided it is safe to so.

If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application.

Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident.

You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:

• depressing the accelerator pedal further
- activating kickdown.
• releasing the brake pedal

The braking action of PRE-SAF®Brake is ended automatically if:

• you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
• there is no longer a risk of collision.
• there is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General information

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.

This steering assistance is provided in particular if:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake.
  • the vehicle starts to skid.

important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 70).

No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if:

- ESP ^ is malfunctioning.

, • the steering is malfunctioning.

Power steering will, however, continue to function.

Theft deterrent locking system

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.

▶ To activate with the SmartKey: remove E- the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

▶ To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

▶ To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully

charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

▶ To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON OFF ①

or

▶ Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

▶ To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartK or KEYLESS-GO.

Indicator lamp ① flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds.

▶ To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

or

▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:

• a door
  • the vehicle with the mechanical key
• the trunk lid
• the hood

▶ To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the ⬤ or ⬤ button on the SmartKey.

The alarm is switched off.

or

▶ Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.

If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data key connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:

• you have subscribed to the mbrace service.
• the mbrace service has been activated properly.
• the necessary mobile phone network is available.

Useful information 84

SmartKey 84

Doors 90

Trunk 93

Side windows 99

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 102

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
  • get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.
  Additionally, children could set the vehicle motion if, for example, they:
• release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
• Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

• with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey
  with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
  • inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.

Do not keep the SmartKey in the in temperature-controlled cup holder (▷ page 323). On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, do not keep it on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be of detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.

A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid vSmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:

• when starting the engine
• whilst driving
• when the external door handles are touched
  • during convenience closing

SmartKey functions

PRAG ① ② ③ P80.35-2476-31

① To lock the vehicle
② To open/close the trunk lid
③ To unlock the vehicle

▶ To unlock centrally: press button ③.

If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:

• the vehicle is locked again.
- the anti-theft alarm system is armed again.

▶ To lock centrally: press button ①.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:

• the doors
• the trunk lid
• the fuel filler flap

The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
When the surround lighting is activated in COMAND, it comes on when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. Information on activating and deactivating the surround lighting can be found in the separate operating instructions.

▶ To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button ② until the trunk lid opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the 🔒 button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:

• when starting the engine
• whilst driving
• when the external door handles are touched
  • during convenience closing

in fter ① ② P80.61-2567-31

▶ To unlock the vehicle: touch the innerThe KEYLESS-GO function is changed as surface of the door handle. follows:
▶ To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ① or ②.
▶ Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ② for an extended period.
▶ To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

Further information on the convenience closing feature (▷ page 100).

▶ To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on none of the door handles.

the trunk lid.

▶ To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.
▶ To lock centrally: press the locking button

▶ To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six g seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▷ page 87).

Changing the settings of the locking system

You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door

and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own.

the Mechanical key

General notes

▶ To change the setting: press and hold down the 📤 and 🔍 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▷ page 87).

If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔒 or 🔗 button!

• locks or
• unlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

▶ To unlock the driver's door: press the button once.
▶ To unlock centrally: press the button twice.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 81).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.

▶ To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

P80.20-3748-31 ① ② on.

▶ Push release catch ① in the direction of and regard for the environment. National the arrow and at the same time remove guidelines must be observed during disposal. mechanical key ② from the SmartKey. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

For further information about:

• unlocking the driver's door (▷ page 92)
• unlocking the trunk (▷ page 98)
• locking the vehicle (▷ page 93)

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Inserting the mechanical key

▶ Push mechanical key ② completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

Checking the battery

e ① P80.35-2473-31

▶ Press the ☐ or ☑ button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp ① lights up briefly. If The battery is discharged if battery check on lamp ① does not light up briefly.

▶ Change the battery (▷ page 87). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔒 or ⬤ button:

• locks or
• unlocks the vehicle

You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.

Environmental note

Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 86).

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling

① ② P80.35-2478-31

▶ Press mechanical key ② into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover ① opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover ① closed while doing so.
▶ Remove battery compartment cover ①.

3D rendering of a car body component with a numbered indicator (3) and part number P80.35-2477-31, showing internal structure without any text or symbols on the body itself.

▶ Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery ③ falls out.
▶ Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
▶ Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
▶ Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover ① into the housing first and then press to close it.
▶ Insert mechanical key ② into the SmartKey.
▶ Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.	The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. ▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 87) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 87).If this does not work: ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷ page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
	There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷ page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
	The SmartKey is faulty. ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷ page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key. ▶ Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.	The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. ▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 87) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 87).If this does not work: ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷ page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
	There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
	KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. ▶ Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. ▶ Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: ▶ Unlock (▷ page 92) or lock (▷ page 93) the vehicle using the mechanical key. ▶ Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey.	The on-board voltage is too low.▶ Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:▶ Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 371).or▶ Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 373).or▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be started using the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle.	The vehicle is locked.▶ Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
	There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a SmartKey.	▶ Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the mechanical key.	▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
  • get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:

• release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
• Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or

cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You should preferably place luggage or load in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 316).

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (▷ page 69). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 81).

Car interior diagram with numbered labels pointing to a device, showing dashboard and steering wheel

▶ To unlock and open a front door: door handle ②.

If the door is locked, locking knob ① up. The door is unlocked and opens.

▶ To unlock a rear door: pull door handle ②. Locking knob ① pops up and the door unlocks.

▶ To open a rear door: pull door handle again.

The door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both front doors.

① ② cle open hey

▶To unlock: press button ①.

To lock: press button ②.

If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.

If the driver's door is open, the door stays unlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

The doors can be opened from the inside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-ull proof locks (▷ page 69).

If the vehicle has been locked with the ops SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 81).

If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside:

• the vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked
• only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the

driver's door had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

Car interior diagram with labeled parts and a magnified inset showing a device component with two buttons and lock icons.

▶ To disarm: press and hold button ① for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

▶ To arm: press and hold button ② for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.

You could therefore be locked out if:

• the vehicle is being pushed.
• the vehicle is being towed.
- the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

You can switch the automatic locking function on and off using COMAND (see separate operating instructions).

Power closing

Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid into their locks automatically even if they a only partly closed.

▶ To power close a door: push the door into the lock up to the first detent position.
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
▶ To power close the trunk lid: lightly push the trunk lid closed.
The power closing function pulls the trunk lid closed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.

▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 86).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

d has me 1 P72.10-4027-31

▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1 and hold it in this position.
the The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

a)fe you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 81).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Trunk

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.

▶ Open the driver's door.
▶ Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid.
▶ Press the locking button (▷ page 91).
▶ Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 86).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 P72.10-4038-31

▶ Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked.

▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

▶ Make sure that the doors and the trunk are locked.

▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

If you lock the vehicle as described above the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking on a sudden change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

WARNING

offf persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▷ page 429).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out.

You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 316).

Obstacle recognition with the trunk lid reversing feature

On vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature, the trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with ove, reversing function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically.

The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid.

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing movement

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped:

• press the 📋 button on the SmartKey, or
• press the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or
• press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or
• pull on the trunk lid handle

Closing

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal compartments, showing structural details (no text or symbols)

▶ Pull the trunk lid down using recess ①.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature or power closing:

▶ Lightly push the trunk lid closed. The power closing function pulls the trunk or lid closed.

- Lock the vehicle if necessary with the 🔒 button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (▶ page 85).

If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked. It then opens again.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

Side view of a silver sedan car with a numbered inset showing the front panel and side window (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
▶ Pull handle ①.
▶ The trunk lid opens.

Opening/closing automatically from outside

Important safety notes

WARNING

Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the Closing closing process:

• Press the 📋 button on the key.
• press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.
• Pull the trunk lid handle.

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running especially if the vehicle is in motion. There a risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

① ② P80.61-2569-31

▶ To close: press closing button ① in the trunk lid.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors are closed, you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" sectio (▷ page 429).

Opening

You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.

▶ Press locking button ② in the trunk lid. is If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle is locked.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.

▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

or

▶ If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk handle and let it go again immediately.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

id WARNING

The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors.

! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk:

• using a car wash
• using a power washer

Make sure that the key is at least 6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

General notes

With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points:

• Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle.
• When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice.

Front view of a silver sedan car with a numbered badge on the front wheel (no visible text or symbols on the car body)

• Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors ①.
- Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from rear area while doing so.
- Do not come into contact with the bump while making the kicking movement.

Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly.

• HANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started.

• If a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you:

• set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle.

• polish the rear of the vehicle.

Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the trunk.

• Dirt caused by road salt around sensors ① may restrict functionality.
• Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

>30 cm >12 in

Illustration of a seated figure standing next to a car, with a blue arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

P80.61-2582-31

▶ To open/close: kick into sensor detection range ① under the bumper with your foot. You will hear a warning tone while the trunk lid is opening or closing.
▶ If the trunk lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten

the seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or

close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs.

To stop the opening or closing procedure:

• move your foot in the sensor detection range under the bumper or
• pull the handle on the outside of the trulid or
• press the closing button in the trunk lid
• press the 📋 button on the SmartKey

If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped:

- move your foot under the bumper again the trunk lid will open.

If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped:

- move your foot under the bumper again the trunk lid will close.

Opening/closing automatically from inside

Important safety notes

WARNING

Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

• Press the 📋 button on the key.
• press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.
• Pull the trunk lid handle.

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening or the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▶ page 429).

Opening and closing

1 P54.25-8940-31

You can open and close the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary the and unlocked.

▶ To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid ① until the trunk lid opens.
▶ To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid ① until the trunk lid is completely closed.

Locking the trunk separately

You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened.

Interior view of a car showing a device with two labeled buttons (① and ②) and directional arrows, no readable text or symbols present.

Activating the function to lock the trunk separately:

▶ Close the trunk lid.
▶ Open the glove box.
▶ Push the switch to position ②. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked.

You can also lock the glove box (▷ page 317).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately:

▶ Open the glove box.
▶ Push the switch to position ①. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked.

1 2 P72.20-3174-31

▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go from position 1 to position 2.
The trunk is unlocked.

▶ Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it.

▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

When you lock the vehicle (▷ page 93), the trunk is also locked.

Trunk emergency release

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey, KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREE ACCESS, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 81).

▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 86).

▶ Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lock as far as it will go.

y) is ① P8:50-3090-31

tenPress emergency release button ① briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving.

Title trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged.

Trunk lid emergency release light:

• emergency release button ① flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
- emergency release button ① flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.

Side windows

Important safety notes

WARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.

WARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the sid window again.

WARNING

If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side windows

The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

Diagram of car interior showing labeled compartments and a zoomed-in view of the first four compartments

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 inTo do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out ignition lock. the following functions simultaneously:
▶ To open manually: press the corresponding switch.
▶ To open fully: press the corresponding switch beyond the point of resistance. Automatic closing is started.
▶ To close manually: pull the corresponding switch.
▶ To close fully: pull the corresponding switch beyond the pressure point. Automatic closing is started.
▶ To interrupt the automatic opening/closing: press/pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door.
When the override feature for the side windows is activated (▷ page 70), the side windows cannot be operated from the rea
i Information on opening and closing the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows (▷ page 324).
▶ Press and hold the 📤 button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.
▶ Press and hold the 📤 button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position.
▶ To interrupt convenience opening:
release the button.
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.

Convenience opening

General notes

You can ventilate the vehicle before you stad procedure. driving.

If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is simultaneously:

available.

Convenience opening

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

WARNING

Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:

• close the side windows
• close the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powerPanorama roof with power tilt/sliding tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the panel are fully closed.

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:

• the side window (▷ page 99)
• the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (▷ page 103)

Using the SmartKey

▶ Press and hold the ☐ button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel:

▶ Press and hold the 🔒 button again un the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing: release the 🔒 button.

Using KEYLESS-GO

The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. If the side window opens again slightly:

the doors must be closed.

1 P80.61-2570-31

i Make sure you only touch recessed e sensor surface ①.

▶ Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
▶ Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it.

▶ Close all the doors.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (▷ page 99).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

▶ Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (▷ page 99).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
▶ If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

▶ Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle until the side windows and the

Problems with the side windows

WARNING

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releas the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

A side window cannot ▶ Remove the objects. be closed because it is ▶ Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

A side window cannot be closed and you If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/slide panel

Important safety notes

In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

WARNING

While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures.

gIf somebody becomes trapped:

• release the switch immediately, or
• during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

WARNING

,If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion.

If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small isk fingers
• over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free. This means that the reversing feature cannot of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. may occur.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the Make sure that no body parts are in close sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could proximity during the closing procedure. be damaged. If somebody becomes trapped:

! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave a vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.

Id release the switch immediately, or

- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor

pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with numbered arrows and a magnified circular view highlighting three key points.

Sliding sunroof reversing feature

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.

① To raise
② To open
③ To close/lower

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.

If you press or pull the ☐ switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it lowers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if roof carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof.

If contact is made with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers slightly but remains raised at the rear.

Rain-closing feature

The raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers at the rear when driving if it starts rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depend on:

• the road speed and
  • the intensity of the rain.

You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the switch in any direction.

To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the switch in direction ①. The rain-closing feature remains activated.

Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof

Important safety notes

WARNING

When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

If somebody becomes trapped:

• release the switch immediately, or
• during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The front roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the sliding sunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing feature

The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds.

WARNING

The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

If somebody becomes trapped:

• release the switch immediately, or
  • during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
  The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the front roller sunblind

① ② ③ P54.25-8993-31

① To open
② To open
③ To close

i The front roller sunblind can only be closed when the sliding sunroof is closed

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock.
▶ Press the ☐ switch in direction ①. The front roller sunblind opens, then the sliding roof is raised.
▶ Pull the ☐ switch in direction ②. The front roller sunblind opens.
▶ Pull the ☐ switch in direction ③.

The front roller sunblind closes if the slidin sunroof is closed.

If you press or pull the ☐ switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again.

Opening and closing the rear roller sunblind

Operating from the front

Close-up of a car's side mirror and steering wheel, showing a magnified inset highlighting the gear shift (no text or symbols present)

▶ To open or close: press button ①. The rear roller sunblind opens or closes fully.
▶ To stop: press button ① again.

You must first open or close the rear roller sunblind fully before you can move it in the other direction.

Operating from the rear compartment

the ①

To open/close manually: press or pull switch ① to the point of resistance and hold it until the rear roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
▶ To open/close fully: press or pull switch ① beyond the point of resistance and release it.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and roller sunblind

Resetting the sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblinds

① P77.20-2796-31

Reset the sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind if the sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind does not move smoothly.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock.
▶ Pull the ☐ switch repeatedly to the po of resistance in the direction of arrow ① until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
▶ Keep the ☐ switch pulled for an additional second.
▶ Pull the ☐ switch in the direction of arrow ① repeatedly until the front roller sunblind is closed.
▶ Keep the ☐ switch pulled for an additional second.
▶ Make sure that the sliding sunroof (▷ page 103) and the front roller sunblind (▷ page 105) can be fully opened again.
▶ If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

thBesetting the rear sunblind

Car interior diagram with labeled door panel and close-up of device highlighting a lock symbol

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull switch ① repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed.
▶ Keep switch ① pulled for an additional second.
▶ Make sure that the rear roller sunblind can be opened fully again (▶ page 105).
If this is not the case, repeat the steps point above again.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING

If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Part of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

If somebody becomes trapped:

• release the switch immediately, or
• during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
  The closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction co a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

▶ Immediately after it blocks, pull the ☐ switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly:

▶ Immediately after it blocks, pull the ☐ switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Useful information 110

Correct driver's seat position ..... 110

Seats 111

Steering wheel 127

Mirrors 130

Memory function 133

Memory function in the rear compartment 134

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Correct driver's seat position

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

• adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
• fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

Diagram of a car interior showing driver's seatbelt and steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to the seat.

- Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment ( page 111). - Check whether you have adjusted seat ③ properly ( page 112).

theWhen adjusting the seat, make sure that:

- you are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.

• you are sitting in a normal upright position.

- you can fasten the seat belt properly.

- you have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position.

- you have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported.

- you can depress the pedals properly.

▶ Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly.

When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.

▶ Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (▷ page 127).
▶ Make sure that steering wheel ① is adjusted properly (▷ page 127).

When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that:

• you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• you can move your legs freely.
• you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
  ▶ Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (▷ page 57).
  ▶ Check whether you have fastened seat belt ② properly (▷ page 59).

The seat belt should:

• fit snugly across your body
- be routed across the middle of your shoulder
- be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints

▶ Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road traffic conditions (▷ page 131).
▶ Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function (▷ page 133).

Seats

Important safety notes

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

• adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
• fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

WARNING

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

WARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle and occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING

If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking

Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

To avoid damage to the seats and the seat d heating, observe the following information:

• keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.
• if the seat covers are damp or wet, do no switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.

• clean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care".

• do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or too. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.

• when the seat heating is in operation, not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seat

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats

Vehicles with standard head restraints or luxury head restraints

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ P91.10-3691-31

① Head restraint height
② Head restraint height
③ Seat height
④ Seat cushion angle
⑤ seat cushion length
⑥ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑦ Backrest angle

If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position (▶ page 78).

You can store the seat settings using the memory function (▷ page 133).

To ensure the largest possible range of theseat settings, certain seat adjustment functions will automatically activate other seat adjustment functions.
The head restraint height is adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint

ng ts ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑦ ⑥ P91.10-3691-31

① Head restraint height
② Head restraint fore-and-aft position
③ Seat height
④ Seat cushion angle
⑤ seat cushion length
⑥ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑦ Backrest angle

If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position (▷ page 78).
You can store the seat settings using the memory function (▷ page 133).
To ensure the largest possible range of seat settings, certain seat adjustment functions will automatically activate other seat adjustment functions.
i The head restraint height is adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

i The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint is adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seat

Adjusting the rear seat

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P54.25-9217-31

① Head restraint height
② Head restraint fore-and-aft position
③ Backrest angle
④ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑤ Combined seat cushion angle and length
You can only adjust the outer seats in the electrically.

Adjusting a rear reclining seat

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P54.25-9216-31

① Head restraint height
② Head restraint fore-and-aft position
③ Backrest angle
④ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑤ Combined seat cushion angle and length

⑥ Legrest angle
⑦ Legrest length

The rear reclining seat is only available in long wheelbase vehicles equipped with "executive seats". On vehicles without a rear reclining seat the button for setting the angle and length of the legrest has no function.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear reclining seat is either only on the front-passenger side or on both sides.

Vehicles with a long wheelbase and a "Real compartment chauffeur/memory package" also have a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front-passenger seat backrest (▶ page 114).

The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is the case fold up the legrest and engage it.

Setting the reclined position

1 rear P54.25-9108-31

This function is only available with long wheelbase vehicles.

You can use the override button to disable this function (▷ page 69).

▶ Press and hold button ① until the seat has reached the reclined position.
The rear seat moves into the reclined position, the front-passenger seat moves into the chauffeur position (▷ page 117). The footrest moves out from under the front-passenger seat.

You can exit the reclined position and adjust the seat position by:

• calling up a stored position using memory buttons 1 or 2 (▷ page 134)
• manually adjusting the seat to the desired position (▷ page 112).

The steps for setting the reclined position are not always carried out simultaneously. The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is the case fold up the legrest and engage it.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat

Important safety notes

WARNING

The front-air bags for could also injure the vehicle occupants in the front. If the front seats are positioned too close to the dashboard or steering wheel. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far from the front air bags as possible. A observe the notes on the correct adjustment of the seats.

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat

parcel net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

on is 1 R P51.25-9025-31

▶ To select the front-passenger seat: press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button ① lights up, for the front-passenger seat you can adjust:

- adjust the seat (▷ page 112)

are seat heating/ventilation Also the memory function to call up or save settings (▷ page 133).

Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the rear

Important safety notes

WARNING

The front-air bags for could also injure the vehicle occupants in the front If the front seats are positioned too close to the dashboard or steering wheel. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far from the front air bags as possible. Also observe the notes on the correct adjustment seat of the seats.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. NeV leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

▶ To select the rear seat: press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

The rear-compartment seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

Adjust the rear seats with buttons ② to ⑥.

WARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the parcel net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged.

You can use the rear-compartment override button to disable the setting of front-passenger seat from the rear (▷ page 69).

Adjusting the rear seat

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

① Selects rear-compartment seat
② Head restraint height
③ Head restraint fore-and-aft position
④ Backrest angle
⑤ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑥ Combined seat cushion angle and length

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

1 2 3 4 5 P54.25-9208-31

the Selects the front-passenger seat
② Head restraint height
③ Backrest angle
④ Seat height
⑤ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

▶ To select the front-passenger seat:

press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Adjust the front-passenger seat with buttons ② to ⑤.

Adjusting the rear seat on vehicles EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints

1 2 3 4 5 6 P54.25-9209-31

① Selects rear-compartment seat
② Head restraint height
③ Head restraint fore-and-aft position
④ Backrest angle
⑤ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑥ Combined seat cushion angle and length

▶ To select the rear seat: press button repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

The rear-compartment seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button is not lit

▶ Adjust the rear seat with buttons ② to

EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints are available on vehicles equipped with a "Rear compartment chauffeur/memory package".

Adjusting the front-passenger seat vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury restraints

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style F fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

① Selects the front-passenger seat
② Head restraint height

withhead restraint fore-and-aft position

④ Backrest angle
⑤ Seat height
⑥ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

▶ To select the front-passenger seat:

press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Adjust the front-passenger seat with buttons ② to ⑥.

EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints are available on vehicles equipped with a "Rear compartment chauffeur/memory package".

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur mode hand long wheelbase

'Adjusting the rear seat

Diagram showing a circular layout with numbered zones and directional arrows, likely illustrating vehicle or system flow patterns.

① Selects rear-compartment seat

② Head restraint height
③ Head restraint fore-and-aft position
④ Backrest angle
⑤ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑥ Combined seat cushion angle and length
⑦ Longitudinal direction of the legrest if rear reclining seat is installed
⑧ Angle of the legrest if rear reclining seat is installed

▶ To select the rear seat: press button repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

The rear-compartment seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button is not

▶ Adjust the rear seats with buttons ② to ⑧.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ P54.25-9210-31

① Selects the front-passenger seat
② Head restraint height
③ Head restraint fore-and-aft position
④ Backrest angle
⑤ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑥ Seat height
⑦ Footrest

▶ To select the front-passenger seat:

press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Adjust the front-passenger seat with buttons ② to ⑦.

The footrest can only be adjusted if:

• the front-passenger seat is moved fully forward
• the front-passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode (▷ page 117).

©Chauffeur mode

Important safety notes

WARNING

If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking

Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

WARNING

If the front-passenger seat is in chauffeur mode and the front-passenger head restraint is folded down, the view of the passenger-side exterior mirror can be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

To have a free view of the exterior mirror, remove the front-passenger head restraint.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

General notes

the In chauffeur mode:

• the front-passenger seat is moved forwards
• the backrest is tilted forwards
• the head restraint is folded forwards

The front-passenger seat automatically moves from the chauffeur position back into the normal position if:

• the front-passenger seat is adjusted using the seat adjustment switch on the front-passenger door
• the front-passenger seat belt is fastened
- an occupant is detected on the front-passenger seat

• the front-passenger seat head restraint is▶ inserted and the ignition is switched on
• the front-passenger seat backrest is moved backwards or the seat is moved in a longitudinal direction out of the chauffeur area (▶ page 120).

To select the front-passenger seat: press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Press button ② forwards and hold it in this position.

Positioning the front-passenger seat forThe seat moves forward. chauffeur mode The seat stops at the th

General notes

Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 117). Adjust the seat for chauffeur mode before the journey (▷ page 118). Do remove the front-passenger seat head restraint during the journey.

Adjusting from the rear compartment

① ② P54.25-9270-31

You can use the override button to disable this function (▷ page 69).

In order for the front-passenger seat to be positioned in chauffeur mode:

• the front-passenger door must be closed
• the SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and in position 1 or 2 (▷ page 171)
• the front-passenger seat may not be occupied
• the front-passenger seat belt must not be inserted into the buckle

The seat stops at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.

▶ Release button ②.
▶ Press and hold button ② again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeur mode.

The head restraint on the front-passenger seat folds forwards. The seat moves forward.

The To view the ext. mirror, adjust front-passenger seat or remove the head restraint. message appears in the multifunction display (▷ page 299).

If the front-passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for the chauffeur mode, the position for the chauffeur mode is set immediately.
The position for chauffeur mode can be saved or set using the memory function of the rear seat (▷ page 135). For this the indicator lamp on button ① must be lit.

Adjusting from the driver's seat

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and seatbelt switch mechanism with numbered parts and directional arrows

In order for the front-passenger seat to be Installing/removing the head restraint positioned in chauffeur mode:

• the front-passenger door must be closed
- the SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and in position 1 or 2 (▷ page 171)
- the front-passenger seat may not be occupied
- the front-passenger seat belt must not be inserted into the buckle

▶ To select the front-passenger seat:

press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Press button ② forward and hold it. The seat moves forward.

The seat stops at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.

▶ Release button ②.

▶ Press and hold button ② again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeur mode.

The head restraint on the front-passenger seat folds forwards. The seat moves forward.

The To view the ext. mirror, adjust front-passenger seat or remove the head restraint. message appears in the multifunction display (▷ page 299).

k ① ② ③ ④ P91.16-2982-31

▶ Move the seat into the position for chauffeur mode, until the head restraint folds forward completely (▷ page 118).

▶ Fold head restraint bar covers ② backwards.

▶ Pull adjuster lever ④ backwards and hold it in this position. Hold head restraint ① while doing so.

▶ Remove head restraint ①.

▶ Release adjuster lever ④. Red pin ③ protrudes from the adjuster lever.

▶ Press down red pin ③.

▶ Fold covers ② forwards and close them.

Installing

If the front-passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for the chauffeur mode, the position for the chauffeur mode is set immediately.

The position for chauffeur mode cannot be stored or set with the driver's seat memory function.

ur e ① ② ③ ④ P91.16-2983-31

▶ Fold covers ② backwards.
▶ Pull adjuster lever ④ backwards and hold it in this position.
Red pin ③ protrudes from the adjuster lever.
▶ Insert head restraint ① into the brackets. The head restraint must engage on both sides.
▶ Release adjuster lever ④.
▶ Press down red pin ③.
If the pin can be pressed down and is no longer visible, the head restraint has engaged correctly.
▶ Fold covers ② forwards and close them.
The head restraint folds into position automatically.

Moving the front-passenger seat into the normal position

Adjusting from the rear compartment

① ② ③ P54.25-9268-31

You can use the override button to disable this function (▷ page 69).

The head restraint must be installed, in order for the front-passenger seat to be moved into the normal position (▷ page 119).

▶ To select the front-passenger seat: d press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up. ▶ Press button ③ backwards and hold it in this position. The front-passenger seat moves into the normal adjustment range at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint folds into position. When you continue to hold down button ③, the seat continues to move backwards.

or

▶ Briefly press button ② backwards. The front-passenger seat moves into the normal adjustment range at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint folds into position.

i Further settings are available via the memory adjustment buttons, if:

• a position in the normal setting has already been saved.
• the front-passenger seat has been selected with button ①.

Adjusting from the driver's seat

① ② ③ P91.10-3702-31

The head restraint must be installed, in order for the front-passenger seat to be moved into the normal position (▷ page 119).

▶ To select the front-passenger seat: T press button ① repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Press button ③ backwards and hold it in this position.

The front-passenger seat moves into the normal adjustment range at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint folds into position.

If you continue to hold down button ③, seat continues to move backwards.

or

▶ Briefly press button ② backwards. The front-passenger seat moves into the normal adjustment range at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint folds into position.

i Further settings are available via the memory adjustment buttons if the front-passenger seat has been selected with button ①.

Adjusting from the front-passenger seat

▶ Press any seat adjustment button. The front-passenger seat moves into the normal adjustment range at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint folds into position.

Fully reclined position of the front-passenger seat

Adjusting

This function is only available on vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats.

You can move the front-passenger seat into a fully reclined position. The rear seat and front-passenger seat then provide a continuous surface.

To do so:

• move the seat cushion of the rear seat as far back as possible in a longitudinal direction (▷ page 113)
• move the front-passenger seat into position for chauffeur mode (▷ page 118)
• remove the front-passenger seat head restraint(▷ page 119)
• move the front-passenger seat so that the backrest is in a fully reclined position (▷ page 112).

Exiting

To exit the fully reclined position:

• fold the backrest upright to a suitable position
• install the head restraint (▷ page 119).

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the front head restraints

Important safety notes

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

• adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
• fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

WARNING

If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the

head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

General notes

Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 111).

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.

Adjusting the standard head restraint mechanically

Interior view of a car seatbelt with blue directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

With this function you can adjust the distal between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.

▶ To move forwards: pull the head restra forwards in the direction of the arrow unit engages in the desired position.
▶ To move backwards: press and hold release button ①.
▶ Push the head restraint back.
▶ Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position.
▶ Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly.

Adjusting the luxury head restraint mechanically

① ② ③ ① ② P91.16-2950-31

▶ To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.
▶ To adjust the fore-and-aft position forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of arrow ② until it engages in the desired position.
▶ To adjust the fore-and-aft position backwards: press and hold release button nce③.
▶ Fold the head restraint backwards in the direction of arrow ②.

am Release the release button once head until restraint ③ is in the desired position.

▶ Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly.

Adjusting the EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint mechanically

ed ① ① P91.16-2958-31

This head restraint is available on vehicles with the "EASY ADJUST" or "Rear-

compartment chauffeur/memory package" equipment.

▶ To adjust the side bolsters of the I restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.

▶ To adjust the fore-and-aft position: s the button for head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment forwards or backwards in the direction of the arrow (▷ page 112).

▶ The height of the head restraints can be adjusted using the seat adjustment switch (▷ page 112).

i The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint is adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat backrest angle using the seat switch.

Adjusting the front head restraints electrically

The height and fore-and-aft position of the front head restraints can be adjusted with seat adjustment switch (▷ page 112).

Adjusting the outer rear seat head restraints

Lowering electrically from the front

1 2011/16-2981-31

This function is available on vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Briefly press button ①. The head restraints lower.

Extending from the front electrically

This function is available on vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press button ① and hold it down until the
lidehead restraints are fully extended.

Extending the outer rear head restraints into the last stored position

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

▶ Briefly press button ①. The head restraints lower.

▶ Briefly press button ① again. The head restraints move to the last stored position.

If all outer head restraints are already lowered, they will move straight into the last position.

the Adjusting the luxury head restraint in the rear compartment mechanically

Diagram showing car interior airflow with numbered arrows indicating rotational or fluid movement paths

▶ To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.
▶ To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.
The height and fore-and-aft position of the rear head restraints can be adjusted with the seat adjustment switch (▷ page 113).

Adjusting the rear head restraints electrically

The height and fore-and-aft position of the rear head restraints can be adjusted with seat adjustment switch (▷ page 113).

Supplementary cushion for luxury head restraints

The supplementary cushion is available on vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats.

Only use the supplementary cushion when the vehicle is stationary.

① ② P91.16-2966-31

The supplementary cushion is located in the vehicle.

The supplementary cushion is attached to the head restraint by three press studs.

To install the supplementary cushion:

▶ Position the head restraint as far forwards as possible (▷ page 113).
▶ Hold supplementary cushion ② against the head restraint and push press studs ① into the counterpieces.
To remove the supplementary cushion:
▶ Position the head restraint as far forwards as possible (▷ page 113).
▶ Release press studs ① and remove supplementary cushion ②.

Adjusting the rear center head restraints

Retracting and extending electrically

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, front side, and backrest (no visible text or symbols)

This function is available on vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats.

▶ Press and hold button ① until the head restraint has fully extended or retracted.

Folding into position mechanically

Interior view of a car showing seat, rearview, and side profile with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This function is available on vehicles with a rear bench seat.

▶ Pull the head restraint up until it engages.

°Adjusting the multicontour seat

The multicontour seat can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Adjusting the active multicontour seat

The active multicontour seat can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Multicontour seat in the rear

You can use the Rear Seat Entertainment System to adjust the multicontour seats for the outer seats (see the separate operating instructions).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

The 4-way lumbar support can be adjusted with COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

WARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

Car interior control panel with labeled directional indicator and hand gesture icon

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Comfort package: the armrest in the door and the rear armrest or the rear-compartment center console can also be heated when you switch on the seat heating of one of the front or rear seats. This can be set with COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.

The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.

The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

The distribution of the heated surfaces on the seat cushions and backrests in the front can be set via COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment System and electric seat adjustment: you can set the distribution of the heated sections of

the rear seat cushion and backrest via the Rear Seat Entertainment System (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Problems with the seat heating

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.	The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.▶Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be switched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating

1 P5A:25-9039-34

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (▷ page 100). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.

When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The seat ventilation has the on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical switched off consumers are switched on.

prematurely or cannot be switched on.

▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation be switched back on.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

• adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
• fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

WARNING

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

P46.15-2539-31

① To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
② To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:

• EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 129)
• Storing settings (▷ page 133)

Never• Operating the on-board computer (▷ page 249).

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

P46.11-2151-31

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem

The steering wheel heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.

▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

WARNING

When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the sea and the steering wheel.

If there is a danger of entrapment by the steering column:

• move the steering wheel adjustment lever.
  If there is a danger of entrapment by the s
• press the switch for seat adjustment.
  The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING

If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat moves backwards if you:

• remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
• with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door
• KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
• with the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171)
• open the driver's door when the ignition is switched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards and the driver's seat only moves backwards, if this driving position is stored after seat or steering wheel adjustment (▷ page 133).

The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if:

• the ignition is switched off.
• the setting is stored with the memory function (▷ page 133).

The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. The driver's seat only moves

backwards if it is not already in the rearmost position.

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat for driving

The steering wheel and the driver's seat are moved to the previously set position if:

• the driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
• you close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on
• you press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

The steering wheel and the driver's seat only return to the last set position when driving position is stored after seat or steering wheel adjustment (▷ page 133).

The last position of the steering wheel or is stored if:

• the ignition is switched off.
• the setting is stored with the memory function (▷ page 133).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.

The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

Close-up of a car front mirror with a numbered label pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the mirror itself)

Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever ① forwards or back. the

Exterior mirrors

seat

Important safety notes

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

• adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
• fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

WARNING

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.

For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a magnified view of the dial indicator

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171). ▶ Tur

▶ Press button ② for the right-hand exterior mirror or button ③ for the left-hand exterior mirror.

The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed.

The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button ① as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

▶ Press adjustment button ① up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusts the exterior mirror to the correct position.

You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a large field of vision.

After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on a the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

Car interior control panel with labeled dial indicator and magnified view of the dial key

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

▶ Briefly press button ①. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

▶ Briefly press button ①.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically

This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

When the "Automatic mirror folding" function is activated in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions):

• the exterior mirrors fold in automatically soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
• the exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows:

▶ Press and hold button ① until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (▶ page 131).

The mirror housing is engaged again and ② you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (▶ page 131).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror the rear wheel on that side as soon as you on the driver's side automatically go into anti-gage reverse gear. You can store this glare mode if the following conditions are position.

simultaneously:

• the ignition is switched on.
- incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

^a Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

in on or of a M 1 2 3 4 P88.75-2605-31

① Memory button M
② Adjustment button
⑤ Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror
④ Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see

the rear wheel on that side as soon as you mitgage reverse gear. You can store this petition.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press button ③ for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.
▶ifEngage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.

▶ Use adjustment button ② to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored.
If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory button

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M①.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press button ③ for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.
▶ Use adjustment button ② to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows to see the rear wheel and the curb.
▶ Press memory button M ① and one of arrows on adjustment button ② within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

▶ If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position setting

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button ③.
▶ Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:

• as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h)
• about ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear
• if you press button ④ for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes see

WARNING

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident.

nOnly use the memory function on the driver side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Storing settings

With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.

The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:

• seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the backrest in the lumbar region
• multicontour seat: the side bolsters of the backrest as well as the contour of the

backrest in the lumbar and shoulder regions

• active multicontour seat: side bolsters of the backrest, shoulder of the backrest, contour of the backrest, dynamic function level
- seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and backrest
- driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides

M 1 2 3 PS4.25-0037-31

▶ Adjust the seat accordingly (▷ page 112).
▶ On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (▷ page 127) and the exterior mirrors (▷ page 131).
▶ Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
If you release the storage position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The multicontour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar support is still carried out.

Memory function in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

WARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

General notes

The settings for the rear seat and the front-passenger seat can be stored using the rear-compartment memory function.

• If the indicator lamp in the 📄 button is not lit, store the rear seat settings.
• If the indicator lamp in the 📄 button lights up, store the front-passenger seat and rear seat settings. Both the front-passenger and rear seat are taken into account with this setting. Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, two or three memory positions can be stored for the n,front-passenger and rear seats.

Storing settings

General notes

With the memory function in the rear, you store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.

The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:

• position of the seat, backrest and head restraint
• multicontour seat: the side bolsters of the backrest as well as the contour of the backrest in the lumbar and shoulder regions

- seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and backrest if the indicator lamp in the 📄 button is not lit.

The following settings are stored to a memo position, if the indicator lamp in the button lights up:

• position of the footrest for the front-passenger seat, if available
• position of the screen, if available

Vehicles without rear reclining seat

3 2 1 M P54.25-9118-31

▶ To select the rear seat: press the button repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

The rear-compartment seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

▶ Adjust the rear seat accordingly (▷ page 113).

▶ To select the front-passenger seat: press the √ button repeatedly until the indicator lamp lights up.

The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

▶ Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly (▷ page 114).
▶ Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected storage position.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat

t is mory 2 1 M P54.25-9266-31

▶ To select the rear seat: press the button repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

The rear-compartment seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

▶ Adjust the rear seat accordingly (▷ page 113).

or

▶ To select the front-passenger seat: press the √ button repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the button lights up. The front-passenger seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button lights up.

Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly (▷ page 114).

▶ Press the M memory button and then press either the 1 or 2 memory button within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected storage position.

You cannot store any settings on the button for setting the reclined position.

The memory positions in the area for the chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for the chauffeur mode are fulfilled (▷ page 117).

Calling up a stored setting

Vehicles without rear reclining seat

▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat are in the stored position.
The seat adjustment procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. The multicontour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar support is still carried out.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat

▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1 or 2 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat is in the stored position.

The seat adjustment procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. The multicontour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar support is still carried out.

Useful information 138

Exterior lighting 138

Interior lighting 144

Replacing bulbs 146

Windshield wipers 146

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Exterior lighting

General notes

For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlamps

Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives the opposite side of the road from the c where the vehicle is registered. This prev glare to oncoming traffic. When using

symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is that exterior lighting (except the parking/lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. standing lamps) switches off automatically if Have the headlamps converted at a qualified you:

specialist workshop as close to the border possible before driving in these countries.

Asymmetrical low beam

Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using:

• the light switch
- the combination switch (▷ page 140)
may the on-board computer (▷ page 262)

Light switch

Operation

1 2 3 4 5 AUTO P54.25-9059-31

1 ←P Left-hand standing lamps
2 P→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 ≥00≤ Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 D Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
1 ←P← Left-hand standing lamps 2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps 3 ≥00< Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 ≡D Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

▶Turn the light switch to AUTO.

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. ▶Turn the light switch to AUTO.

as remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

- open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0.

Automatic headlamp mode

WARNING

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to ☐.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times.

Only for Canada:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to 300 , the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to 3D , the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

USA only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (▷ page 262).

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to ☑00≤ or ☑D, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

AUTO is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):

- SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock corresponding side of the vehicle is the parking lamps are switched on or offilluminated.

automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

- With the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

▶ To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to AUTO.

Low-beam headlamps by

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog.

▶ To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

▶ Turn the light switch to ☐D. n. The green ☐D indicator lamp in the light instrument cluster lights up.

Parking lamps

! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the ≥00≤ parking lamps light for several hours. If possible, switch on the gs P≤ right or the P≤ left standing lamp.

▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to 200 .

The green 200 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

▶ To switch on the standing lamps: the Press the combination switch beyond the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is pressure point in the direction of in position 0. arrow ①.
▶ Turn the light switch to P ≤slant (left-hand side in the AUTO position, the high-beam of the vehicle) or P ≤slant (right-hand side of headlamps are only switched on when it is the vehicle). dark and the engine is running.
Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①. Side in the AUTO position, the high-beam of headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.

Combination switch

Turn signal

P54.25-8995-31

① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left

▶ To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

▶ To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

High-beam headlamps

▶ To switch on the high-beam headlam turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

▶ Turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO.

The blue ☑ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

▶ To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position.

The blue ☐D indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (▷ page 141).

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (▷ page 143).

High-beam flasher

▶ To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.

▶ Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow ③.

Hazard warning lamps

1 aps: P54.25-8996-31

▶ To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will ▶ To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:

• an air bag is deployed or
• the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.

The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

Night street scene with a pedestrian crossing a zebra crossing, a car, and a person walking (no visible text or symbols)

The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.

Active:

• if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal on the turn the steering wheel
• if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above

25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn

signal or turn the steering wheel to the flas straight-ahead position.

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

Illustration of a car driving on a road with light trails, no text or symbols present

Illustration of two cars driving on a road with motion blur effect, no text or symbols present

You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

WARNING

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users:

• who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
• who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier

In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.

Always carefully observe the traffic condition and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is:

• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain snow
- dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

P54.25-8995-31

① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left

▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to AUTO.

▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①.

The □A indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above or approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The

indicator lamp in the multifunction displaysigns, the lights are automatically dimmed remains lit.

and glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided.

▶ To switch off: move the combination

switch back to its normal position or move the system's optical sensor is located behind the light switch to another position. the windshield near the overhead control

The □ indicator lamp in the instrument panel.

cluster goes out.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS

General notes

Two identical grayscale images showing a car driving on a road with light trails, no text or symbols present.

With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between low-beam, partial high-beam and high-beam headlamps Partial high-beam is a form of illumination

whereby the high-beam is directed past oth road users. Other road users are kept out the high-beam. This prevents glare. When

there is a vehicle in front, for example, the high-beam headlamps illuminate the areas t

its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the low-beam headlamps.

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

If the high-beam or partial high-beam are causing too much reflection from traffic

Important safety notes

WARNING

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not recognize road users:

• who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
• who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier. In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognize road users who do have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.

Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic an conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is:

e• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or to snow

is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS on/off

P54.25-8995-31

① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left

▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to AUTO.
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①.

The indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h) and other road users have been detected:

Partial high-beam is selected automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):

The partial high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. If no other road users are recognize, the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads are adequately illuminated:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.

▶ To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position.

The □A indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

1 2 3 4 5 P68.00-6982-31

① To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
② To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off

③ To switch the front interior lighting on/off

④ To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

⑤ To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off

The color, brightness, zone and display lamp for the ambient lighting may be set using COMAND (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

The interior lighting control can be operated using the front overhead control panel.

Control panel in the grab handle compartment)

① ② ③ P68.00-696-501

▶ To switch on on the corresponding of the vehicle: press button ②.

Reading lamp ① and the make-up lamp light up.

▶ To switch off: press button ②.

Press once: the make-up lamp goes out.

Press twice: reading lamp ① goes out.

▶ To switch on on both sides of the vehicle: press button ③.

Reading lamp ① and the make-up lamp light up.

▶ To switch off: press button ③.

Reading lamp ① and the make-up lamp go out.

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from warning lamp button.

discharging, the interior lighting functions are or

automatically deactivated after some time

unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting control

▶ To activate/deactivate: press the button.

When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush the overhead control panel.

with

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:

- unlock the vehicle

- open a door

- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The interior light is activated for a short while siden the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

Manual interior lighting control

▶ To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the 📋 button.
▶ To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the 📄 button.
▶ To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the 📄 button.
on/

Crash-responsive emergency lighting

The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

▶ To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard

▶ Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required.

Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have headlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place with the windshield is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the winds wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.

For this reason, you should always switch conditions. off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Do 5 4 3 2 1 6 P54.25-8997-31

the 1 0 Windshield wiper off

2 ⋯ Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)
3 .... Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)
4 — Continuous wipe, slow
5 = Continuous wipe, fast
⑥ Single wipe/ To wipe the windshield using washer fluid

▶ Switch on the power supply with the Start/Stop button or the SmartKey (▷ page 171).
▶Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.

In the ⋯ or ⋯ position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the ⋯ position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the ⋯ position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently.

i Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and when wiping with washer fluid ☐ the washer fluid is emitted directly from the blades.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic

For this reason, you should always switch conditions. off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield.

▶ As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Remove the SmartKey.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.

Removing the wiper blades

1 2 3 4 5 per P82.30-3061-31

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when Press both release clips ②.

you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Fold wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ③ away from wiper arm ④. Remove wiper blade ① in the direction arrow ⑤.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have installing the wiper blades

! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades (standard windshield wipers)

Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Set the windshield wiper to the position.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

1 2 3 4 5 6 P82.30-3062-31

▶ Position the new wiper blade ① with recess ⑥ on lug ⑤.
▶ Fold wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ③ onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ② engage in bracket ④.

▶ Make sure that wiper blade ① is seated correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click.

▶ To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob ② and pull the wiper blade upwards ③.

Moving the wiper blades to a vertical Installing the wiper blades position

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Set the windshield wiper to the position.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Remove the SmartKey.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield until you feel them snap into place.

Removing a wiper blade

① ② ③ P82.30-3063-31

① ② ③ P82.30-3064-31

▶ Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① onto the wiper arm until tab ② engages.
▶ Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow ③ beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again.
▶ Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

▶ To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The windshield wipers are obstructed	Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windsh wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.►Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and op driver's door.►Remove the cause of the obstruction.►Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers fail completely.	The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.►Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.►Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified speciali workshop.
	The wiper motor has been deactivated.►Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and op driver's door.►Remove the cause of the obstruction.►Switch the windshield wipers back on.
For a standard wiper system only: the windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield.	The spray nozzles are misaligned.►Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

Useful information 152

Overview of climate control systems 152

Operating the climate control systems 155

Setting the air vents 166

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Overview of climate control system

Important safety notes

Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.

To prevent the windows from fogging up:

• switch off climate control only briefly
• switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
• switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
• switch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed.

The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (▷ page 163).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (▷ page 100). This will speed up the cooling

process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the way vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 60 minutes after the key has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic climate control.

Automatic climate control panel

AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MAX MENU REAR REST AUTO

AUTO SYNC AUTO BEET AUTO 72°F AUTO AUTO OFF 72°F 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 P83.40-4840-31

USA only

Front control panel

① To set climate control to automatic, left (▷ page 157)
② To set the temperature, left (▷ page 159)
③ To set the airflow, left (▷ page 160)
④ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 163)
⑤ To defrost the windshield (▷ page 161)
⑥ To call up the COMAND climate control menu
⑦ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 162)
⑧ To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (▷ page 163)
⑨ To set the airflow, right (▷ page 160)
⑩ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 159)
⑪ To set climate control to automatic, right (▷ page 157)

Rear control panel (only vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)

⑫ To set the temperature, left (▷ page 159)
⑬ To set the air distribution, left (▷ page 160)
⑭ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 157)
⑮ To set the airflow (▷ page 160)
⑯ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 155)

To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (▷ page 163)

⑰ To set the air distribution, right (▷ page 160)
⑱ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 159)

AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AUTO SYNC AUTO REST AUTO 22°C AUTO AUTO OFF 22°C 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 P83.40-4838-31

Canada only

Front control panel

① To set climate control to automatic, left (▷ page 157)
② To set the temperature, left (▷ page 159)
③ To set the airflow, left (▷ page 160)
④ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 163)
⑤ To defrost the windshield (▷ page 161)
⑥ To call up the COMAND climate control menu
⑦ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 162)
⑧ To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (▷ page 163)
⑨ To set the airflow, right (▷ page 160)
⑩ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 159)
⑪ To set climate control to automatic, right (▷ page 157)

Rear control panel (only vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)

⑫ To set the temperature, left (▷ page 159)
⑬ To set the air distribution, left (▷ page 160)
⑭ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 157)
⑮ To set the airflow (▷ page 160)
⑯ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 155)

To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (▷ page 163)

⑰ To set the air distribution, right (▷ page 160)
⑱ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 159)

Notes on using climate control

Automatic climate control

Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate control optimally.

• Activate climate control using the AUTO rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the AUTO rocker switch lights up.
• Set the temperature to 72^ (22 °C).
• Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.
• Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is driven into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
• Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is switched off when the ignition is switched on.

If you are controlling the rear climate control

using the front control panel, note the following:

• If you set rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel, the symbol appears in the rear-compartment control panel display.
• If the rear-compartment climate control is set using the front control panel, it cannot be set at the same time using the rear control panel. If controlling the rear climate control from the front control panel is locked, wait five seconds. You will then be able to control the rear climate control using the rear control panel.
  • After selecting the rear compartment settings, the front climate control can be controlled automatically again via COMAND after five seconds.

Alternatively, you can select "Cancel rear compartment" in the COMAND air-conditioning function bar.

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (▷ page 177).

Operating the climate control systems

Switching climate control on/off

General notes

When the climate control is switched off, air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly
Switch on climate control primarily using the AUTO rocker switch (▷ page 157).

Switching the front climate control on and off using the control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press the MENU rocker switch up or down.

The COMAND climate control menu opens.

▶ Activate climate control via the air-conditioning setting bar in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
To deactivate: press the MENU rocker switch up or down.

The COMAND climate control menu opens.

▶ Deactivate climate control via the air-conditioning setting bar in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Switching the front climate control off using the control panel

on/activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification

Observe the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel (▷ page 155).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press the MENU rocker up or down. The COMAND climate control menu ope
▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions). You can control the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel or COMAND.
▶ Activate rear-compartment climate control via the air-conditioning setting bar.
▶ To deactivate: press the MENU rocket switch up or down. The COMAND climate control menu opens
▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).
▶ Deactivate rear-compartment climate control via the air-conditioning setting bar

General notes

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The switch windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a

emalfunction.

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification

"You can activate or deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Switching rear-compartment climate control on/off using the control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press rocker switch ⑯ up or down (▷ page 153).
The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑯ goes out. All settings are displayed in full in the rear-compartment display.

▶ To deactivate: press rocker switch ⑯ up or down (▷ page 153).

The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑯ lights up. OFF is displayed in the rear-compartment display.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Cooling with air dehumidification can no longer be switched on using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).	Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to malfunction. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic Controlling front climate control General notes automatically using the front control panel

In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.

The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Set the desired temperature using the w ▼ ▲ rocker switch on the front control unit.

▶ Set the desired temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ To activate: press rocker switch AUTO up or down. The indicator lamp in the AUTO rocker switch lights up.

▶ To switch to manual operation: press the rocker switch up or down.

or

▶ Set the airflow using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). or
▶ Set the air distribution using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). The indicator lamp in the AUTO rocker switch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp on the AUTO rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic

mode, the indicator lamp on the AUTO rocket switch lights up again.

Controlling rear climate control automatically using the front control panel

Observe the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel (▷ page 155).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press the top or bottom section of the MENU rocker switch. The COMAND climate control menu opens

▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions). You can control the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel or COMAND.

▶ Set the desired temperature using the ▼▲ rocker switch on the front control unit.

or

▶ Set the desired temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ To activate: press the AUTO rocker switch on the front control unit up or down.

or

▶ Activate automatic mode via the air-conditioning setting bar in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). The indicator lamp in the AUTO rocker switch lights up.

i Select the temperature and automatic mode immediately thereafter. Otherwise, you will have to select "Rear adjustment" again from the air-conditioning setting bar before activating automatic mode.

To switch to manual operation: press the MENU rocker switch up or down. The COMAND climate control menu opens.

▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

▶ Use the air-conditioning setting bar to deactivate automatic mode. or

▶ Set the air distribution using rocker switch ⑬ or ⑰ on the rear control panel (▷ page 153). or

Set the airflow using rocker switch ⑮ on the rear control panel (▷ page 153). The AUTO indicator on the rear display goes out.

If you adjust the rear airflow or air distribution manually using COMAND when in automatic mode, the AUTO indicator on the rear display goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the AUTO display reappears in the rear-compartment display.

Controlling rear climate control automatically using the rear control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Set the desired temperature using rocker switches ⑫ and ⑱ (▷ page 153).
▶ To activate: press rocker switch ⑭ up or down (▶ page 153). The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑭ lights up.

To deactivate: press rocker switch ⑭ up or down (▷ page 153). The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑭ goes out.

If you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually when in automatic mode, the AUTOAUTO

display in the rear-compartment display goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the AUTO display reappears in the rear-compartment display.

Adjusting the climate mode settings

In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's front-passenger areas:

FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler

MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draft

▶ To set: set the climate mode using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the temperature

General notes

Top-down view of a car interior with four quadrants showing internal vehicle views (no text or symbols visible)

You can set the temperature separately for the following areas on vehicles with rear-compartment climate control:

• front footwells, left and right
- driver and front passenger area
• rear compartment, left and right

Top-down view of a car interior showing four seats and two open seats, with no visible text or symbols.

You can set the temperature separately for and the following areas on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control:

• front footwells, left and right
- driver's and front-passenger sides

Setting the temperature in the front compartment using the front control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To increase/reduce: press the rocker switch up or down.

or

▶ Set the temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).

Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel

Observe the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel (▷ page 155).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press the top or bottom section of the MENU rocker switch.

The COMAND climate control menu open.

▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

You can control the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel or COMAND.

▶ To increase/reduce: press the ▼▲ rocker switch on the front control panel or down.

or

▶ Set the temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).

Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To increase/reduce: press rocker switch ⑫ or ⑱ up or down (▷ page 15

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).

Setting the footwell temperature

The footwell temperature for the driver and front passenger can be set separately using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

Directs air through the defroster vents separate operating instructions).

Directs air through the center and side air vents

Directs air through the footwell air vents

Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents

Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents

Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting the air distribution in the front/rear compartment using COMAND

The air distribution for the left and right sides of the front and rear compartment can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the air distribution in the rear compartment using the rear control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press rocker switch ⑬ or ⑰ up or down repeatedly (▷ page 153) until the desired air distribution symbol is shown in the display.

3) Setting the airflow

Setting the front-compartment airflow using the front control panel

You can select different airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment (only vehicles with rear compartment climate control).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To increase/reduce: press the rocker switch up or down.

or

▶ Set the airflow using COMAND (see the

Directs air through the defroster vents separate operating instructions).

Directs air through the center and side air vents

Setting the rear compartment airflow using the front control panel

Observe the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel (▷ page 155).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press the top or bottom section of the MENU rocker switch.

The COMAND climate control menu opens.

▶ Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-conditioning setting bar (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

You can control the rear-compartment climate control using the front control panel or COMAND.

▶ To increase/reduce: press the rocker switch on the front control panel or down.
or
▶ Set the airflow using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the rear compartment airflow using the rear control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To increase/reduce: press rocker switch ⑮ up or down (▷ page 153).

Switching the synchronization function on/off

Climate control can be set centrally using synchronization function. The settings for temperature, air distribution and airflow on the driver's side are adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment (vehicles with rear-compartment air conditioning).
▶ To activate/deactivate: switch the synchronization function on or off using

COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Vehicles with rear-compartment air conditioning: the SYNC display appears on the rear-compartment display.

The synchronization function is deactivated:

• if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed
• vehicles with rear-compartment air conditioning: the settings for the rear compartment are changed.

Defrosting the windshield

You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the front side windows.

Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press the MAX rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp in the MAX rocker switch lights up.

The climate control system switches to the following functions:

• high airflow
• high temperature
  • air distribution to the windshield and front side windows
  • air-recirculation mode off

• windshield heating on

▶ To deactivate: press the MAX rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp in the MAX rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.
or
▶ Press the AUTO rocker switch up or down.

or

▶ Use the MENU rocker switch to call COMAND climate control menu.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

▶ Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function via COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Switch on automatic mode using the AUTO rocker switch.
▶ If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the MAX rocker switch. The windshield heating is switched on.

You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

▶ Activate the windshield wipers.
▶ Switch on automatic mode using the AUTO rocker switch.
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes

The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating

up the Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press the REAR rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the REAR rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem

The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.

▶ Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

General notes

You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

• after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 °F (5 °C)
• after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
- after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41^(5^) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated

Activating/deactivating

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press the 📄 rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp in the 📄 rocker switch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution or at high outside temperatures. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated.

Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.

▶ To deactivate: press the 📄 rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp in the 📄 rocker switch goes out.

Activating/deactivating the residual heat function

General notes

Vehicles with rear-compartment climate control: once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the rear and front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 15 minutes. If the "Residual heat" function is set for only the front or only the rear compartment, it is possible to continue heating or ventilating for approximately 30 minutes.

Vehicles without rear-compartment climate control: once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

The heating or ventilation time depends on Residual heat is deactivated automatically: the temperature that has been set. • after approximately 30 minutes if the

Front control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (▷ page 171).
▶ To activate: press the REST rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp in the REST rocker switch lights up.

▶ To deactivate: press the REST rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp in the REST rocker switch goes out.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.

Rear control panel

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (▷ page 171). REST appears in the rear compartment display.
▶ To activate: press rocker switch ⑯ up down (▷ page 153).

The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑯ lights up.

▶ To deactivate: press rocker switch ⑯ up or down (▶ page 153).

The indicator lamp in rocker switch ⑯ goes out. REST goes out on the rear compartment display.

If you do not activate the residual heat ① Perfume lid function, REST goes out automatically after ② Perfume vial five minutes on the rear compartment display.

• after approximately 30 minutes if the residual heat function is activated in the front or rear compartment
• after approximately 15 minutes if the residual heat function is activated in the front and rear compartments

• when the ignition is switched on
• if the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

WARNING

If children open the perfume vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficulties, consult a doctor.

or up oes ① ② P83.40-4755-31

① Perfume lid ② Perfume vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort.

Using COMAND, you can:

• switch the perfume atomizer on and off
  • regulate the perfume intensity See the separate operating instructions.

The following conditions can affect your perception of the perfume intensity: not achieve optimum results from the perfume atomizer.

• operating mode of the automatic climate control
• interior temperature
• time of year/day
• air humidity
• physiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on.

The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-filled perfume vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.

▶ To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (▷ page 317).

▶ Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

▶ To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial.

▶ To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

▶ Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the desired liquid perfume.

▶ Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The vehicle interior is not perfumed although the perfume atomizer is activated.	The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will go.▶ Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
	The perfume vial has not been adequately filled.▶ Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.▶ Use a new pre-filled vial.▶ Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the same perfume.
	The perfume atomizer is faulty.▶ Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ionization

You can use the "Ionization" function to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate.

The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior.

You can switch ionization on and off using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Ionization can only be switched on if the front automatic climate control is activated. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open.

outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:

• keep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
• never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air

Setting the center air vents

air in P83.40-4839-31

① Fixed center air vent
② Center air vent, right

③ Center vent thumbwheel, right

④ Center vent thumbwheel, left

⑤ Center air vent, left

▶ To open/close: press thumbwheel ③ or ④.

The thumbwheel pops out.

▶ Turn thumbwheel ③ or ④ clockwise or counter-clockwise.

▶ To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent ② or ⑤ by the middle fin and move up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the side air vents

① ② ③ P83.40-4845-31

① Side window defroster vent

② Side air vent

③ Thumbwheel for left side air vent

▶ To open/close: press thumbwheel ③. The thumbwheel pops out.

▶ Turn thumbwheel ③ clockwise or counterclockwise.

▶ To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ② by the middle fin and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the glove box air vent

! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.

At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise,

temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.

When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.

air ove ① ② P83.40-4748-31

① Air vent thumbwheel

② Air vent

▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ① clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment air vents

Setting the center vents in the rear compartment

1 2 3 4 5 air up or P83,40-4846-31

① Rear-compartment air vent, left
② Rear-compartment air vent, right
③ Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel, air right

④ Rear control panel
⑤ Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel, left

Vehicles with rear-compartment climate control

▶ To open/close: press thumbwheel ③ or ⑤.

The thumbwheel pops out.

▶ Turn thumbwheel ③ or ⑤ clockwise or counter-clockwise.
▶ To adjust the air direction: hold rear air

vent ① or ② by the middle fin and move up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the rear air vent

① ② P83.00-2370-31

▶To open/close: turn thumbwheel ② to the left or right.

▶ To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent ① by the middle fin handle and move up or down or to the left or right.

① ② ③ P83.40-4847-31

Vehicles without rear-compartment climate control

▶ To open/close: press thumbwheel ③.
The thumbwheel pops out.
▶ Turn thumbwheel ③ clockwise or counterclockwise.
▶ To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent ① or ② by the middle fin and move up or down or to the left or right.

Useful information 170

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 170

Driving 170

Automatic transmission 179

Refueling 187

Parking 190

Driving tips 193

Driving systems 199

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehic

Important safety notes

The sensors of certain drive and driving safe systems automatically reset during driving for a certain distance after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs have been carried out. Complete system effectiveness is reached only after completion of this teach-br in procedure.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

- Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. - Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). - All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), laydrive in program E.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed.

Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles:

• Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
• Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.

Change gear in good time.

Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C.

You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the respective speed limits.

Driving

Important safety notes

The first 1000 miles(1500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.

• You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).
• Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period.
• When shifting gears manually, upshift in good time, before the tachometer needle

reaches 23 of the way to the red area of the tachometer.

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:

• shoes with thick soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake

• overheat and cause a fire
- lose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. For the parking brake fully before driving off.

operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

Key positions

SmartKey

0 1 2 3 p54.25-8998-31

To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position
3 To start the engine

The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to S the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 °F (+20 °C), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect engine and maintain smooth engine

General notes

All vehicles are equipped with a removable Start/Stop button.

A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine.

To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey:

• the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock.
  ne the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
• the vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 85).

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

• with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey
• with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
  • inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.

Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder (▷ page 323). Otherwise, the SmartKey will not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine with the Start/Stop button.

The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKe remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:

• you will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button.
• you will not be able to start the engine until the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (▷ page 91), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

You do not have to remove the Start/St button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:

• the vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button
  • the electrically powered equipment can be operated

The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

SmartKey positions with the Start/Stop button

1 2 gine m 915.10-24 53-31

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (▷ page 303).

If Start/Stop button ① has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.

▶ Insert Start/Stop button ① into ignition lock ②.

When you insert Start/Stop button ① into ignition lock ②, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button ①.

▶ To switch on the power supply: press Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Start/Stop button ① once. motion if, for example, they:

The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

i The power supply is switched off again

• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① twice when in this position

To switch on the ignition: press Start Stop button ① twice.

The ignition is switched on.

i The power supply is switched off again

• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① once when in this position

3 ENGINE START STOP 4 P80.61-2626-31

③ Start/Stop button USA
④ Start/Stop button Canada

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
  • get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.

• release the parking brake.

- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P

- Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

if:

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never lead the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING

Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire.

Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

General notes

During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission

▶ Shift the transmission to position P(▷ page 179). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P(▷ page 181).
You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171) and release it soon as the engine is running.
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button

You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if only leave it for a short time. Pay attention the important safety notes.

▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button once (▷ page 171). The engine starts.

i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

▶asDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (▷ page 192) is automatically released.

The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

yult is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (▷ page 92).

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins a roll.

WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and inj. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill star assist.

▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a sec
▶ Pull away.

Hill start assist is not active if:

• you are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient.
• the transmission is in position N.
  • the electric parking brake is applied.
• ESP ^ is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction

The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving: There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn on the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

123.0 mi 26753 ① ECO

P54.33-2444-31

① ECO start/stop display on

If the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving.

Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated.

If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (▷ page 177) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ECO symbol is not displayed.

The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles).

Automatic engine switch-off

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is operational i AMG vehicles: times which the engine and the ECO symbol is displayed in green incan be automatically switched off. the multifunction display, if:

• the indicator lamp in the ECO button is green.
• the outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system.
• the engine is at normal operating temperature.
• the set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached.
  • the battery is sufficiently charged.
• the system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on.
  • the hood is closed.
• the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off have not been fulfilled, the ECO symbol will be shown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine has been stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

All vehicles (apart from AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times consecutively (initial stop then repeated three times). The ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible.

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

ge you switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button.
- you switch to drive program S or M.
- you release the brakes when in transmission position D or N and when the HOLD function is not active.
- you depress the accelerator pedal.
- you engage reverse gear R.
- you move the transmission out of position P.

• you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door.

- the vehicle starts to roll. - the brake system requires this.

- the temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range.

• the system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on.

he the charge level of the battery is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ECO symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO 1 2 P54.25-9060-31

▶ To switch off (except AMG vehicles):

press ECO button ①.

Indicator lamp ② and the ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out.

If drive program S or M has been selected the ECO start/stop function is always deactivated.

▶ To switch on (except AMG vehicles):

press ECO button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. If all condition for automatic engine switch-off

(▷ page 175) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display.

If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▷ page 175) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available.

▶ To switch off (AMG vehicles): in drive

program C, press ECO button ①.

or

▶ Switch to drive program S or M

(▷ page 182).

Indicator lamp ② and the ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out.

If drive program S or M has been selected,

the ECO start/stop function is always deactivated.

To switch on (AMG vehicles): press ECO button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. If drive program S or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▶ page 175) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▶ page 175) have not been fulfilled, the ECO symbol will be shown in yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available.

If indicator lamp ② is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops.

If you switch on the ECO start/stop function while drive program S is selected, the drive program automatically switches to E (drive program C on AMG vehicles).

Problems with the engine
Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.	There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.Try to start the engine again (▶ page 173). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.If the engine does not start after several attempts:Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.	The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.Jump-start the vehicle (▶ page 373).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.	There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system.Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 °F (120 °C).	The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.Check the coolant level (▶ page 351). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. This is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or always firmly depress the brake pedal and not simultaneously accelerate.

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

R N P N D P27.60-3647-31

P Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive

The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right steering column.

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current

transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (▷ page 181) in the multifunction display.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The do automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.

R N P N D P27.60-3647-31

P Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive

▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automatically

Park position P is automatically engaged if:

• you switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey.
• you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.
• you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R.

Engaging reverse gear R

of the ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.

▶ If the transmission is in position D or push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past first point of resistance.
N If the automatic transmission is to remain in the neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions:

▶ If the transmission is in position P: dep the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/st function ( page 175).

Shifting to neutral N

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:

• open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
  • get out and disrupt traffic.
  • operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:

• release the parking brake.
• shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
• Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

Using the SmartKey:

• Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
- When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
- Shift to neutral N.

- Release the brake pedal.

• If the electric parking brake is engaged, release it.
• Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:

• Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
- When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
- Engage park position P.

- Release the brake pedal.

- Pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition.

- Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

- Switch on the ignition.

- Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

- Shift to neutral N.

- Release the brake pedal.

erIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it.

- Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

▶ If the transmission is in position D or RE, push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N.

Engaging drive position D

▶ If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position display

General notes

! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. For this purpose, we recommend selecting transmission position D and automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles) or S.

The current transmission position is shown the multifunction display.

i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

R N P 0 ①—D3 E—③ ② P54.33-2287-31

① Transmission position
② Gear
③ Drive program

AMG vehicles

R N P 1/min x1000 ① D C ② B P54.33-2998-31

in ① Transmission position
② Drive program

Transmission positions

P

Park position

Do not shift the transmission into position P(▷ page 190) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

R

Reverse gear

Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.

N

Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it.

If ESP ^ is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.

D

Drive

The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by:

• the selected drive program E/S (drive programs C/S on the AMG vehicles) (▷ page 182)
  • the position of the accelerator pedal
• the road speed

Driving tips

N Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.
▶ Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management restricts switching between transmission positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever up and down past the point of resistance.

Program selector button

1 S E P27.60-3576-21

▶ All vehicles (except AMG vehicles):

press program selector button ① to change the drive program. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display.

① S C M P27.60-3667-31

▶ AMG vehicles: press program selector button ① repeatedly until the letter of desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.

The program selector button influences:

• the drive program (▷ page 183)
• the engine management

In AMG vehicles, drive program E is called drive program C.

When the engine is started, the automatic transmission always switches to automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles).

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

E Economy Comfortable, economical driving
S Sport Sporty driving style

You can also activate manual drive program button (▷ page 185). In manual drive M using the steering wheel paddle shifters program M, you can permanently change (▷ page 184). In manual drive program M, gear yourself by using the steering wheel you can briefly change gear yourself by using paddle shifters.

the steering wheel paddle shifters.

AMG vehicles

C Controlled Comfortable, economical Efficiency driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting

i Permanent drive program M is only available for AMG vehicles.

Further information about permanent drive program M(▷ page 185).

You can also activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters ( page 184). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

For further information on the automatic drive program, see (▷ page 183).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car interior with labeled dashboard and steering wheel, showing brand logo and numbered components.

You can activate manual drive program M in the E and S automatic drive programs using steering wheel paddle shifters ① and ② (▶ page 184). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

AMG vehicles: you can also activate manual drive program M with the program selector

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive programs E and S

Drive program E (drive program C on MAG vehicles) is characterized by the following:

• the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully
• increased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example
• the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by the following:

• sporty engine settings
  • the vehicle pulling away in first gear
• the automatic transmission shifting up later
• the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points

Manual drive program M

General notes

In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.

You can activate manual drive program M in automatic transmission protects against the E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic engine damage by not shifting down. drive programs.

i AMG vehicles: as well as temporary drivecoasting.

program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M.

Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 185).

Activating

▶ Shift the transmission to position D.
▶ Pull the left or right steering wheel padd shifter (▷ page 183).
Manual drive program M is temporarily activated.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles: M the selected gear appear in the multifunction display.

Shifting gears

If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted.

▶ To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 183). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.

i AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission will not shift up to the next gear when the engine speed is very low.

▶ To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 183).

ge The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the

in automatic transmission protects against tic engine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs when

Shift recommendation

R N P 3 ↑4 ① ② 0 7

and

P54.33-2835-31

The gearshift recommendations assist you adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display.

Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes.

▶ Shift to recommended gear ② according to gearshift recommendation ① when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Switching on the manual drive program

In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. You can see the currently selected drive program and

Deactivating

If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.

If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected.

You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself:

▶ Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (▷ page 183).
or
▶ Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch transmission position.
or
▶ Use the program selector button to chan the drive program (▷ page 182). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches to the previously activated drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S

▶ Press the program selector button in (▷ page 182) repeatedly until M appears the multifunction display.

Upshifting

! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

the 68°F 75 mph ① ② 3 ↑UP 200 250 200 180 160 140 120 P54.33-2949-31

Manual drive program (AMG vehicles)

General information

⑪ Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area, In this drive program, you can permanently an upshift indicator will be shown in the change gear yourself by using the steering multifunction display.

wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. If the color in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and

the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear using the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear if this is permissible.

Downshifting

▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 183).
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear if this is permissible.
Maximum acceleration
▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear according to the speed.
If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down.

Switching off the manual drive program

▶ Press the program selector button (▷ page 182) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.

Problems with the transmission

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The transmission has problems shifting gear.	The transmission is losing oil.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear.	The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift intosecondgear and reverse ge▶ Stop the vehicle.▶ Shift the transmission to positionP.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.▶ Shift the transmission to positionDorR.IfDis selected, the transmission shifts intosecondgear; ifRis selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Transfer case

! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.
! To prevent ESP from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey of the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)

• the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer.
• the vehicle is being towed with only on axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be damaged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raises as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.

Refueling

Important safety notes

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

e! WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel observe the following:

• Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
• If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
• If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
• Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion.

Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter ① To open the fuel filler flap the fuel system. Even small amounts of the ② To insert the fuel filler cap wrong fuel could result in damage to the ③ Tire pressure table fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the ④ Fuel type to be used fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Switch the engine off

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the Open the driver's door.
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on paint surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel of Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

,If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality (▷ page 423).

Refueling

General information

Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 187).

If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.

The position of the fuel filler cap is shown in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

① ② ③ ④ P88.60-2354-31

① To open the fuel filler flap the ② To insert the fuel filler cap
③ Tire pressure table ④ Fuel type to be used
Switch the engine off.

heOpen the driver's door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed".

The driver's door can be closed again.

▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.

The fuel filler flap swings up. ▶ Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it.

▶ Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of filler flap ②.
▶ Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
▶ Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap

▶ Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
▶ Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (▶ page 286).

In addition, the ☐ Check Engine warning lamp may light up (▷ page 308).

For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (▷ page 308).

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.	⚠ WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.▶ Apply the electric parking brake.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Press the Start/Stop button.The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. ⓘ When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "Key removed".▶ Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.	The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.▶ Unlock the vehicle (▷ page 85).or▶ Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 86).
	The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

- release the parking brake.

shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.

- start the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally:

• the electric parking brake must be applie
- the transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock.
- the front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
- the empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
- a laden vehicle must also be secured at rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

If the engine cannot be switched off as described here, see "Emergency engine cutoff" (▷ page 381).

Using the SmartKey

▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.

If you turn off the engine with the SmartKey and then remove it from the ignition lock or open a front door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.

With the Start/Stop button

▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button (▷ page 171). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "Key removed".

If you turn off the engine with the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to N. If you then open one of the fror doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P.

If you drive through a car wash with a conveyor, you can:

• switch on the ignition using the Start/Stop button and shift the transmission to N
• insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, switch on the ignition and shift the transmission to N

In the event of an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Electric parking brake

General notes

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

• release the parking brake.
• shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
• start the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake.

▶ If this is the case, only park the vehicle level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.

It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake, if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal

Applying/releasing manually

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel (no visible text or symbols)

▶ To engage: push handle ①. When the electric parking brake is applied, the PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up in the verinstrument cluster.

The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.
To release: pull handle ①. The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
i The electric parking brake can only be on released:

• when the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or
• if the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button.

^W Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is engaged automatically if:

• DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary

• Active Parking Assist is holding the vehicle at a standstill

In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• the engine is switched off.
- the driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened.

• there is a system malfunction.
• the power supply is insufficient.
• the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clust lights up.

The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automatically

The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

• the engine is running.
• the transmission is in position D or R.
• the seat belt has been fastened.
• you depress the accelerator pedal.

If the automatic transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the follow conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake:

• the driver's door is closed.
• you have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

i Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally.

Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.

▶ While driving, push handle ① of the elect parking brake (▷ page 192).

The vehicle is braked as long as you ke handle ① of the electric parking brake

pressed. The longer electric parking brake handle ① is depressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking:

- a warning tone sounds - the Release Parking Brake message appears

- the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging and further damaged in the event of this occurring again.

▶ Connecting a trickle charger.

i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use.

- Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

WARNING

If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.

If you make a call while driving, always use Emission control

hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 m (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

Drive sensibly - save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

▶ The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
▶ Remove unnecessary loads.
▶ Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
▶ Warm up the engine at low engine speed
▶ Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
▶ Have all maintenance work carried out indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Emission control

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.

The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all

sspecific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

ECO Display 59% from Start Accel. Constant Coasting Trip P54.33-2199-31

The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.

The ECO display consists of three bars:

• AccelerationAcceleration
- ConstantConstant
- CoastingCoasting

The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style.

The ECO display does not indicate the actual will change.

fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption.

Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:

• Load
• Tire pressure
• Cold start
• Choice of route

• Electrical consumers switched on

These factors are not included in the ECO display.

The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories:

- AccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes):

• The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds
• The bar empties: sporty acceleration

- ConstantConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times):

• The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
• The bar empties: fluctuations in speed

- CoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerar processes):

The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking

An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds.

To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant:

• observe the gearshift recommendations.
- drive in drive program E.

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for ConstantCo
The ECO display summarizes the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display, see (▷ page 251).

Braking

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip

There is an increased danger of skidding accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes.

When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

WARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while ahead, driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Ne depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.

dYou have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against & corrosion.

early to a lower gear. This allows you to take

advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.

• In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions.
• Carefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey.
• Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle le ahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.

toThe brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in advance. You could otherwise damage drive train or the brake system.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz out recommends only installing the following to brake disks and brake pads/linings:

• brake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
• brake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle.

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time.
Always install new brake pads/linings when king replacing brake disks.

The vehicle is equipped with lightweightbrake disks to which the wheel assemblyrim and threaded connection is matched.

The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if applicable.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the®ESR system operates automatically. The engine and ignition must therefore be switched off SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 ignition lock or the Start/Stop button be in position 0 or 1) if the electric brake is tested on a brake dynamometer

Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP system operates automatically. The eng and the ignition must therefore be swi

off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if:

• the electric parking brake is tested using a brake dynamometer.
• the vehicle is towed with one axle rais

Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange th Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject

moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals.

Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (▷ page 71) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (▷ page 72).

Shock-type loads when handling the brake disks, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could saffect your vehicle's operating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes

The high-performance brake system is only installed on the S 63 AMG 4MATIC.

The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on:

• Speed
• Braking force
  • Environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linin or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving.

Compensate for this by applying greater force

to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display.

Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain dep on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:

• you drive at low speeds.
• the tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner:

• lower your speed.
• avoid ruts.
• brake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified further information on driving safety systems specialist workshop at the onset of winter. (▷ page 70).

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruel control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot stopped when moving at low speed:

▶ Shift the transmission to position N.

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

For more information on driving with snow chains, see (▷ page 387).

For more information on driving with summ tires, see (▷ page 386).

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation section (▷ page 386).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path toward autonomous driving.

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of vehicle occupants and that of other road users.

Cruise control

Important safety notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use cruise control:

- in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads - on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then

- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

P54.25-9005-31

① To activate or increase speed
② To activate or reduce speed
③ To deactivate cruise control
④ To activate at the current speed/last stored speed

When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the current speed

P54.25-9006-31

You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ②.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car steering wheel with a close-up inset showing the connector (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ①.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the

speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed

P54.25-9006-31

Deactivating cruise control

Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car steering wheel and attached audio jack, with a magnified inset showing the connector detail (no text or symbols visible)

There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:

▶ Briefly press cruise the control lever

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment forwards ① until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.

▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.

▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. ESP® interven Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed while driving stored is increased or reduced. If cruise control

▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

- you engage the electric parking brake fly - you are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP - you shift the transmission to position N

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.

Change into a lower gear in good time on and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving roads with steep gradients.

As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will not any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. this device must accept any interferenc received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

loRemoval, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not Bpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

^0 Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

and Important safety notes

WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:

in people or animals

• stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
  • oncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:

• give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle

or neither give a warning nor intervene no accelerate unexpectedly

There is a risk of an accident.

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS.

WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function This speed may:

is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function the following or other similar situations:

• when towing the vehicle
• in the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk there is a change of drivers, advise the new of accident nor override the laws of physical driver of the speed stored.

DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions.

DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:

• in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e in heavy traffic or on winding roads
• on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could the skid
• when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:

• dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• snow or heavy rain
  • interference by other radar sources
  • strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.

• be too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane
• be so high in the right lane that you pass in vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries)
• be so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries)

if there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

in d ot e.g. 1 5 3 4 2 P54.25-9016-31

① To activate or increase speed
② To activate or reduce speed fog,
③ To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
④ To activate at the current speed/last or stored speed
⑤ To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• the engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
• the electric parking brake must be released.

• ESP ^ must be active, but not intervening.
  • Active Parking Assist must not be activated.

• the transmission must be in position D. i If you do not fully release the accelerator

• the driver's door must be closed when youpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive
  shift from P to D or your seat belt must fastened.
• the front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.

Activating

P54.25-9017-31

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ② or press it up ① or down ③. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/last stored speed

WARNING

▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward you ② or press it up ① or down ③. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): brief press the cruise control lever up ① to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ③ for a lower speed.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

or

▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments):

briefly press the cruise control lever up ① past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ③ for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.

Mer ed P54.25-9018-31

▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards vehicle. In this way, the distance you have you ①. selected is maintained.

▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cru speed to the previously stored value.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and battery plug, with a magnified inset highlighting the connector (no text or symbols)

Selecting the drive program

DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S driving program (▶ page 182). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanes

If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when:

▶ If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

- you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) - you switch on the appropriate turn signal - DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision

▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ①.

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.

or

▶ Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.

When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS nomonitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake all times.

Stopping

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: at

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control.

- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. - DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your

• the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
  • the battery is disconnected.
• the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 208).

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle it is stationary.

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress brake.

After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.

Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standst at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and:

• the seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is open.
• the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
  • a system malfunction occurs.
  • the power supply is not sufficient.

If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may be shifted into position P automatically

Setting a speed

e off ① ② P54.25-9019-31

▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.

to adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments):

briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ②, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this

function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (▷ page 207).

i Make sure that you maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front as

required by law. Adjust the distance to vehicle in front if necessary.

For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

P54.25-9020-31

▶ To increase: turn control ② in direction ③.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

▶ To decrease: turn control ② in direction ①.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

60 80 100 mph 120 20 P54.33-2284-31

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, triangle ② shows the stored speed.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

① ② ③ ④ 60 120 140 200 ft 0 ft

P54.33-2281-31

① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front
③ Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
④ Own vehicle

In the Assistance menu (▷ page 259) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display.

▶ Select the Assistance Info Display function using the on-board computer (▷ page 258).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

DISTRONIC PLUS 51 mph ① ② ③ ④

P54.33-2280-31

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front ① and stored speed ② light up. The segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane.

① DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only The appears when the cruise control lever is front actuated)
② Vehicle in front, if detected

③ Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
④ Own vehicle

In the Assistance menu (▷ page 259) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display.

▶ Select the Assistance Info Display function using the on-board computer (▷ page 258).

You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car steering wheel with a close-up inset showing a cable connector (no text or symbols visible)

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:

▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ①

or

▶ Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. five seconds.

The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal.
The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if:

• you engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake
• ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
  • the transmission is in the P, R or N position
• you pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open

• the vehicle has skidded

- you activate Active Parking Assist

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes

Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations:

• Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend
• Vehicles traveling on a different line
• Other vehicles changing lanes
- Narrow vehicles
- Obstructions and stationary vehicles
- Crossing vehicles

In such situations, brake if necessary.

∅ISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out bend

Top-down diagram of a multi-lane highway intersection with vehicles, showing a vehicle approaching toward a truck (no text or symbols)

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

Top-down view of three cars on a road with lane markings, no text or symbols visible

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Top-down schematic of a multi-lane road with vehicles and a vehicle, no text or symbols present

DFSTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

Top-down diagram of a multi-lane road with vehicles and a shaded area, no text or symbols present

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a vehicle, no text or symbols present

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a traffic cone, no text or symbols present

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could call your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.

DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available.

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. In the case of deviations in road markings, beware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are in the direct vicinity of your vehicle.

Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected.

An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist

General notes

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist helps you to drive in the middle of the lane by mean moderate steering interventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means camera system ① at the top of the windshield.

At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses on lane markings that are present.

At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist cannot as of continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In of some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if:

- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray

e you actively change lane

- you use a turn signal

- there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet)

• take your hands off the steering wheel of do not steer for a prolonged period of time

- the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damage or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera

i After you have finished changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is automatically active once more.

- there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with ro construction work

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not provide assistance:

• on very sharp corners

- the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

• if no roadside markings or no clear roadside markings have been detected

- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot detected

- if the vehicle in front is not detected at bepeeds below 37 mph (60 km/h)

- in tire run-flat mode

- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge

• the road is narrow and winding
• there are strong shadows cast on the lane

Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 202).

The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself.

If you do not steer yourself or if take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonge

period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel

symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after t

seconds, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is then switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist

1 2 P54.25-9062-31

Press button ②.

Indicator lamp ① lights up. The DTR+:

Steering Assist. On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist is activated.

Information in the multifunction display

1

P54.33-2350-31

If DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is activated but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol ① appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol ① is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist

1 2 P54.25-9062-31

▶ Press button ②.

Indicator lamp ① goes out. The DTR+:

Steering Assist. Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assi is deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in following situations:

• when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
• when maneuvering on steep slopes
• when waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if:

• there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
• the HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
• the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.

• the battery is disconnected

There is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Further information on deactivating the HOLD function (▷ page 213).

s! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:

• when towing the vehicle
• in the car wash

Activation conditions

You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

• the vehicle is stationary.
- the engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
- the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened.
• the electric parking brake is released.
• the transmission is in position D, R or N.
• DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

1 R N D1 80 ① HOLD

P54.33-2283-31

▶ Make sure that the activation conditions are met.
▶ Depress the brake pedal.
▶ Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ① appears in the multifunction display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:

• you accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R.
• you shift the transmission to position P.
• you depress the brake pedal again with certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display.
• you secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake.
• you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The HOLD function is then deactivated.

The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and:

• the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
• the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• a system malfunction occurs.
  • the power supply is not sufficient.

If a malfunction occurs, then the transmissi may be shifted into position P automatically

Magic Body Control

General notes

Magic Body Control consists of Active Body Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN as well as automatic vehicle stabilization in the event of a crosswind.

Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to improve driving safety and reduce fuel consumption. The suspension mode is adjusted according to your selection (sports or comfort), the road condition and the vehicle load. A multifunction camera detects bumps in the road surface before the vehicle ndrives over them. This reduces chassis movements.

Important safety notes

WARNING

When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact

with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind driving assistance

The crosswind stabilization operates by changing wheel loads through adjusting the ABC spring struts. It reduces impairments in handling when driving in a straight line and assists during countersteering.

Crosswind driving assistance is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control (ABC)

Vehicle level

All vehicles except AMG vehicles:

depending on the vehicle level that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.6 in (15 mm) the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.

AMG vehicles: depending on the vehicle level that has been selected, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.

Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Your 1 2 P32.22-2509-31

Setting the raised vehicle level

▶ Start the engine.

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles:

indicator lamp ② lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level.

AMG vehicles: indicator lamp ② lights up.

The vehicle is raised by 1.5 in (40 mm) compared to the normal level. as

1 2 P32.22-2509-31

Setting the normal vehicle level

Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ② is lit: press

button ①.

Indicator lamp ② goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

The electronically controlled ABC suspension system works continuously. This improves driving safety and comfort. The system detects the vehicle level and the vehicle load and adjusts the setting accordingly. You can

also choose between a particularly sporty (a comfortable tuning.

The ABC suspension system is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

• your driving style, e.g. sporty
  • the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
• your individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort
• the vehicle load
  • the force of the side wind

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

1 2 SPORT ABC COMF P32.22-2521-31

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. The steering response behavior is sporty. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style on flat roads, e.g. on highways. Selecting the sports suspension tuning

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the

Active Body Control Sport message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

SPCRT ABC COMF P32.22-2522-31

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are especially comfortable. The steering response behavior is balanced. Select this mode if you prefer a comfortable driving style.

Selecting the standard comfort mode suspension tuning

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the Active Body Control Comfort message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN

Diagram showing a car interior with a numbered annotation and directional arrows, likely indicating a vehicle or sensor location.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of the vehicle using multifunction camera ① at the top of the windshield. This function is automatically

active if you select comfort suspension consists of level setting, level control and the tuning. The system is operational at speedsAdaptive Damping System ADS. of up to 81 mph (130 km/h).

This function allows bumps in the road surface to be detected before the vehicle drives over them. The spring struts are then actuated, with the result that chassis movements are significantly reduced when driving over bumps.

The system is deactivated when you select the raised vehicle level or the sports suspension tuning.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

Important safety notes

WARNING

When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

• the road surface is insufficiently lit
- there is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog or spray
- there is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic
- the windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
- the road surface has no texture or is reflective, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt, concrete slabs or puddles
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too short
- sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature
- you accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notes

AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

① ② P32.22-2509-31

It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

▶ Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ② is not lit:

Press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. The vehicle is raised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the normal level.

The Vehicle Rising message appears in the display.

The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you

• drive at a speed over approximately 75 mph (120 km/h)
• drive for approximately three minutes at speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle level

▶ Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ② is lit:

▶ Press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② goes out. The vehicle adjusted to normal level.

The Vehicle Lowering message disappears from the multifunction display.

Suspension tuning

General notes

The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers and springs.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:

• your driving style, e.g. sporty
  • the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
• your individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

1 2 SPORT COMF P32.22-2525-31

The firmer suspension tuning in sport mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles:

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level.

The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles:

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level in sport mode.

The AMG Suspension System

SPORTSPORTmessage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort tuning

1 SPORT COMF 2 P32.22-2528-31

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway.

▶ If indicator lamp ② is not lit: press button ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up. Comfort tuning is selected.

All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level in comfort mode.

Load compensation

The vehicle can compensate differences in the vehicle level by raising or lowering the axles. This is the case, for example, if peo get out or if luggage is being loaded.

Load compensation takes place if:

• a door or the trunk lid is opened
  • the parked vehicle is unlocked

For larger level changes, the engine must running.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ES,It improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:

• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.
  • Accelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object.

b e PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always

responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars.

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.

The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:

• switch on the ignition
• shift the transmission to position D, R or N

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

General notes

PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are:

• below the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects
• above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

① ① ① P54-65-4788-31

Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)

ther a 100 50 0 (cm) 0 60 120 (cm) on P54.65-4790-31

Top-down view of a car with two side profiles and a scale bar (0–120 cm), no visible text or symbols on the car itself.

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (▷ page 358).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.

Transmission Position Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling activated backwards

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:

• sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
• seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

① Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle
② Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle
③ Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in rear compartment.

The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational readiness indicator ③ lights up.

The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling

① Indicator lamp ② the to deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp ① is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up.	PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.▶ If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualif specialist workshop.
Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is then deactivated.	The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.▶ Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (▷ page 358).▶ Switch the ignition back on.
	The problem may be caused by an external source of radio ultrasound waves.▶ See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notes

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could aid with ultrasound. It measures the road oresult in a collision with another road user. both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol There is a risk of an accident.

indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (▷ page 218).

Important safety notes

Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range.

When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.

WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive

gnto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. s not

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example:

where parking or stopping is prohibited
- in front of driveways or entrances and exits
• on unsuitable surfaces

Parking tips:

• On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible.
• Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly.

- Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly.

- Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. For

- Pay attention to the PARKTRONIC (▷ page 220) warning messages during the parking procedure.

- You can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled.

- When transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist.

- Never use Active Parking Assist when sno chains are installed.

• Make sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces

- that are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel

• that are on straight roads, not bends

- that are on the same level as the road, not on the pavement

WARNING

If there are objects above the detection range:

• Active Park Assist may steer too early
- the vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident.

If there are objects above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detection range (▷ page 219).

Active Parking Assist does not support you with parking spaces at right-angles to the

direction of travel if:

• two parking spaces are located directly next to one another
• the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb
• you park forwards

Active Parking Assist does not support you with parking spaces that are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel if:

• the parking space is on a curb
- the system reads the parking space as s: being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks

- the area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into

- the parking space is bordered by an e.g. obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.

R N D 80 ① ← P ← ③

P54.33-2282-31

① Detected parking space on the left
② Parking symbol
③ Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces:

• that are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel
• that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
• that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than vehicle
• that are at right-angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the length of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-

passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel.

A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

WARNING

If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if:

• there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
• the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
  • the battery is disconnected.
• the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.

Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.

When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are it responsible for braking in good time.

Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

▶ Shift the transmission to position R. ^a The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:

an □← message appears in the multifunction display.

▶ To cancel the procedure: press the As soon as the parking procedure is
button on the multifunction steecomplete, the Park Assist Finished
wheel or pull away.
or
press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Let go of the multifunction steering wheel yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.

▶ To park using Active Parking Assist:

▶ Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake parking tips:

at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.

Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.

Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

▶ Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.

The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

▶ Drive forwards and be ready to brake at times.

Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill.

The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

• The way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

You can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space.

Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking space

In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space:

the border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example.

- the border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45^ to the

starting position as it is maneuvering into i You will achieve the best results by the parking space. waiting for the steering procedure to

- a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.

If you back up after activation, the steering Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked to

wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist.

Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.

If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time.

Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering, before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This action is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.

▶ Start the engine.
▶ Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: message appears in the multifun display.
▶ To cancel the procedure: press the park button on the multifunction steering

wheel or pull away.

or

▶ To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
- Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. - Pull away, being ready to brake at all time. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R_a required or according to the message while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

Canceling Active Parking Assist

▶ Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. on Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
or
▶ Press the PARKTRONIC button el. (▷ page 220).
mePARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled as automatically if:

• the electric parking brake is engaged
n transmission position P is selected
- parking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible

• you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
• a wheel spins, ESPintervenes or fails. The warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message.

When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you Under the following circumstances, the rear must steer and brake again yourself. view camera will not function, or will function If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is a limited manner:

braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress accelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Side view of a car with a labeled sensor or connector, showing the front wheel and side window (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Rear view camera ① is in the trunk lid ha Rear view camera ① is an optical parking maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAN display.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display.

Important safety notes

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and

parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

•the the trunk lid is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places
- if the camera is exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
- if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (▷ page 358)
- if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the indie. Rear view camera may be restricted due to and additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

i The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

The flap closes again when:

• you have finished the maneuvering process
• you switch off the engine Observe the notes on cleaning (▷ page 358).

For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera

▶ To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

▶ Make sure that the Activation by R geargear function is selected in COMAND the separate operating instructions). ①

▶ Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the ② COMAND display with guide lines.

The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to or after driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the COMAND display

The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not objects in the following positions:

• very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear be further away than they actually are, e.

• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

in ① ② ③ ④ ey

P54.65-4903-31

① Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

5 6 8 snow

P54.65-4904-31

⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of to approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear g.: of the vehicle
⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
⑦ Bumper
⑧ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

P54.65-4905-31

① Front warning display
② Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator
③ Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if

PARKTRONIC is operational (▷ page 220), an additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMAND display ②. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays ① and ③ are active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel

① ② ③ ④ P54.65-4906-31

① White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width, including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

③ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (▷ page 227).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

▶ With the help of white guide line ①, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.
▶ Using white guide line ① as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line ④ is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle

① ② P54.65-4907-31

① Parking space marking
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

▶ Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (▷ page 227).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

▶ While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the

parking space until yellow guide line ② reaches parking space marking ①.

- Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

① P54.65-4908-31

① Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

▶ Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to para with the parking space marking as possible.

① ② ③ P54.65-4910-31

① Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering wheel
③ End of parking space

▶ Back up carefully until you have reached the final position.

Red guide line ① is then at end of parking

space ③. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

① ② P54.65-4909-31

① White guide line at current steering wheel angle ①
② Parking space marking
▶ Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.

Wide-angle function

Security camera screenshot showing a vehicle's lane with numbered annotations pointing to road markings

P54.65-4902-31

① Symbol for the wide-angle view function
② PARKTRONIC warning displays

You can also use the rear view camera to select a wide-angle view.

When PARKTRONIC is operational (▷ page 220), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays ② light up in the COMAND display in yellow or red respectively.

Object detection

The rear view camera can detect moving a stationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrian or another vehicle is detected, these objects are marked with bars. The system is only able to detect and mark stationary objects when your vehicle is moving. By contrast, stationary objects will always be detected and marked.

To ensure that you can use the function, i must be switched on in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

- top view and pictures from the rearward facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) - top view and pictures from the forward facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the transmission from position D or R to N, you see the view which was active before the 360° view in the COMAND display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.

When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view.

360° camera (surround view)

General notes

The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras.

The system analyzes images from the following cameras:

• Rear view camera
• Front camera
• Two cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors

The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision restricted at an exit.

The 360° camera images can be shown in full screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the COMAND display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle: if the doors are open

This view is calculated from the data supplied by the exterior mirrors are folded in by the installed cameras (virtual camera). • if the trunk lid is open

The six split-screen views are:

• top view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle)
• top view and image from the front came (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle)

• top view and enlarged rear view

- top view and enlarged front view

Important safety notes

The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is f not a substitute for attentive driving.

You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.

The 360° camera will not function or will be function in a limited manner:

le: if the doors are open

iodf the exterior mirrors are folded in

• if the trunk lid is open
  • in heavy rain, snow or fog
  • at night or in very dark places
• if the cameras are exposed to very bright light

• if the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker)

- if the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature

- if the camera lenses are dirty or covered - if the vehicle components in which the func cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle.

Guide lines are always shown at road level. The cameras in the front and in the rear area are each protected by a flap. These flaps are opened when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning

(▷ page 358). For technical reasons, the may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated.

Activation conditions

The 360^ camera image can be displayed if:

• COMAND is switched on (see the separate operating instructions)
• the 360° Camera function is activated

If the 360^ camera is activated at speed above 19 mph (30 km/h) a warning message appears.

The warning message disappears if:

• the vehicle's speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360^ camera is then activated.
• the message is confirmed with the OK button.

Activating the 360° camera using the function button

is ing p. You ge area are d. 1 360° P54.25-9064-31

▶Press button ①.

Depending on whether position D or R engaged, the following is shown:

• full screen display with the image from the front camera
• full screen display with the image from the rear camera

You can also switch to the split-screen view from the full-screen view.

Activating the 360° camera with COMAND

▶ To select the 360^ Camera from the vehicle carousel: turn and press the controller. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:

• a split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or
• a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

Further information on the COMAND controller can be found in the separate operating instructions.

Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear

The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear.

▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position! Objects not at ground level may appear to 2 in the ignition lock. be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

- Make sure that the Activation by R geargear function is selected in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). - To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. - the bumper of a parked vehicle - the drawbar of a trailer - the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch - the rear section of an HGV

The area behind the vehicle is shown in the a slanted post COMAND display in split-screen mode. You Use the guidelines only for orientation. see the top view of the vehicle and the Approach objects no further than the image from the rear view camera. bottom-most guideline.

Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays

Switching between split screen views:

▶ To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide the controller ↑◎.

▶ To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:

▶ Turn and press the controller to select FullscreenFullscreen.

i The full screen option is only available in the following views:

- Top view with picture from the rear view camera

- Top view with picture from the front camera

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes

The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations:

• under the front and rear bumpers
• very close to the front and rear bumpers
- in close range above the handle on the trunk lid
• very close to the exterior mirrors
- in the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view

Top view with picture from the rear view camera

ons: ler. ① ② ⑤ ④ ③ P54.65-4871-31

① Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image
③ Guide line for the maximum steering angle
④ Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
⑤ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

6 7 9 8 P54.65-4872-31

⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
⑦ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
⑧ Bumper
⑨ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front camera

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P54.65-4869-31

① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

⑤ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
⑥ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard view with numbered annotations indicating positions of the dashboard panel.

P54.65-4874-31

① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged
② Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.

Top view with picture from the mirror PARKTRONIC appears:

camera

Diagram showing three labeled locations (①, ②, ③) of a car on a road with a vehicle in the background, likely from an automotive navigation or navigation system.

P54.65-4868-31

① Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side vehicle)
You can also select the mirror camera setting for the rear-facing view.

Wide-angle function

Security camera screenshot showing three labeled lanes (①, ②, ③) of a car on a road with traffic lights and vehicle in lane ①.

P54.65-4870-31

① Symbol for the full screen setting with view camera image
② PARKTRONIC warning displays

• in split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
• in the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon

The full screen display can also be selected as front view.

Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.

To select split-screen view, select the symbol in the display then confirm with the COMAND controller.

Exiting 360° camera display mode

As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated, the function switches off. The view which was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the COMAND display. You can also stop the 360° camera display from split-screen view by selecting the symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller.

The 360° camera display is also ended if you select transmission position P.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC of fatigue or increasing lapses in and the function is active ( page 220), concentration on the part of the driver, it warning displays ② in the COMAND display suggests taking a break.

are also active or light up accordingly.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:

• if the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes
• if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are pothole
• if there is a strong side wind
• if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates acceleration
• if you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h)
• if you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS
• if the time has been set incorrectly
• in active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if:

- you switch off the engine.

- you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers to take a break.

Displaying the attention level

ATTENTION ASSIST Last Break 03:20 h A... Attention Level Low High P54.33-2209-31

You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu ^8 page 259 of the on-board computer.

▶ Select the Assistance display for Attention e Assist using the on-board computer of(▷ page 258).

The following information is displayed:

• length of the journey since the last break.
- the attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low.
- if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Passive message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

▶Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (▷ page 261). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal.

Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display when the engine is running. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a Break!

In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone.

▶ If necessary, take a break.
▶ Confirm the message by pressing the OK button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.

If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performe in COMAND. You can select a service state and navigation to this service station will begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered annotations and a magnified view of the dashboard area

In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera ② picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in the multifunction display. The image shown in the display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognized by the system are visually highlighted in color in the Night View Assist Plus display with small frame corners.

Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming ed traffic.

ion addition, thermal imaging camera ① is then integrated in the radiator grill. The camera helps detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the notes on cleaning the thermal imaging camera (▷ page 359).

Important safety notes

Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt

your driving style to suit the prevailing road Pedestrian recognition

and traffic conditions.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

• if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow rain, fog or spray
• if the windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
• if the thermal imaging camera in the radiator grill is dirty, fogged up or covered

• on bends, hilltops or downhill gradients

• at high outside temperatures

Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. ③

It may be the case that other objects are ④ marked or highlighted as well as pedestrians, and animals.

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notes

Pedestrian or animal recognition may be impaired or inoperative if:

• pedestrians or animals are partially or entirely obscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehicles
- the silhouette of the pedestrian or of the animal in the Night View Assist Plus disp is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections
• pedestrians or animals do not contrast with the surroundings
- the camera system no longer recognizes pedestrians as persons due to special clothing or other objects
• pedestrians are not in an upright position e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
• animals are not recognized by the system e.g. because of their size or shape

The pedestrian and animal recognition is deactivated at temperatures above 90 °F

(32 °C). The spotlight function and automatic delayed switch-off are then no longer active.

Nighttime street photo with numbered locations and a person walking, showing road markings and a pedestrian figure.

P54.33-2618-31

① Night View Assist Plus display
② Readiness symbol for active pedestrian acts recognition
③ Highlighting
④ Pedestrian recognized

Night View Assist Plus can recognize pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. the body contours and posture of a person standing upright.

Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if:

• Night View Assist Plus is activated.
- you are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
- it is dark.
- Night View Assist Plus is activated. - you are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). - it is dark.

If pedestrian recognition is active, readiness symbol ② appears. Persons who are detected are highlighted by framing ③. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by looking at a screen.

Animal recognition

Animals can be recognized in the following situations:

• darkness
• outside built-up areas
  • below an outside temperature of 90 °F (32 °C)

Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger animals such as deer, cows or horses using typical characteristics.

The system does not detect:

• smaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats
• animals whose silhouette is not clearly recognizable.

When detected, animals are marked with small color frame corners. In contrast to pedestrian recognition, there is no separate readiness symbol in the multifunction display.

Switching Night View Assist on/off

Activation conditions

You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if all of the following conditions are met:

• the ignition is switched on (▷ page 171) the engine has been started.
• the light switch is in the AUTO or D position.
• reverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

1 P54.25-9021-31

▶ Press button ①.

The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the multifunction display.

The infrared headlamps only switch on the dark from speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working

The infrared headlamps are deactivated at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night View image continues to be displayed until you deactivate it by pressing button ①.

Automatic delayed switch-off

You can select the Night View Assist Automatic Activation option via the Night View Assist menu. The pedestrian and animal search function remains active even when the Night View image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Night View image is automatically displayed in the multifunction display as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected.

▶ In the assistance menu, select automatic us delayed switch-off of Night View Assist Plus (▷ page 260).

or

Deactivating Night View Assist Plus

▶ Press button ①.

The Night View Assist Plus display disappears from the multifunction display. Night View Assist is deactivated.

Spotlight function

General notes

Under certain conditions, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash at detected pedestrians.

The spotlight function is only active if:

• pedestrian recognition is active
• the road surface is not lit
• the driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h)

the "Adaptive Highbeam Assist" (▷ page 142) or "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" function is activated

^in The spotlight function is not active or is active only to a limited extent if: do

• you are driving in city traffic
• there are pedestrians located in the area of g, an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight function

The pedestrian detection with spotlight function is running in the background. If the prerequisites are met, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestrian detected on or near to the road surface.

▶ In the light menu, select the spotlight function of Night View Assist (▷ page 262).

The spotlight function does not flash at animals.

Display in the assistance graphic

① - 300 ft - 200 ft - 100 ft 0 ft P54.33-2619-31

Pedestrian symbol ① in the assistance graphic indicates the status of the spotlight function. If the symbol is displayed not filled in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is displayed filled in, the conditions for the spotlight function are met.

Displaying the assistance graphic

▶ Select the Assistance Graphic menu on the on-board computer (▷ page 258).

Problems with Night View Assist

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated.	The windshield is fogged up on the inside.▶ Fold down camera cover (▷ page 359).▶ Defrost the windshield (▷ page 162).
	The windshield is iced up.▶ De-ice the windshield (▷ page 161).
	The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.▶ Replace the wiper blades (▷ page 147).
	The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash.▶ Clean the windshield (▷ page 357).
	There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.▶ Replace the windshield.
The pedestrian and animal recognition is not available.	The infrared camera in the radiator grill is dirty.▶ Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notes

The Active Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 201), Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 240) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 243).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is

detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are pointed in the direction of travel. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.

the WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

- vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area - vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance

USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System" The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors

The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are spray integrated into the front and rear bumpers Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Markicated.

sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. Rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage, the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area

WARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) P54.70-2630-31

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the use diagram.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of:

• dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect The narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the to lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane.

Due to the nature of the system:

• warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.
• warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

Interior view of a car showing a steering wheel and dashboard with a magnified inset highlighting the number 1 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

① Warning display

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings.

Black and white abstract image with two circular markers labeled '2' and a number 1, no readable text or symbols.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ②. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warning

If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

WARNING

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

0 180 200 220 240 60 ② 3 2 1 0

P54.33-2294-31

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp ① flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ② underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display.

In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly the opposite direction or accelerate.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km). Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if:

- there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.

- a vehicle approaches you too closely at side.

- you have adopted a sporty driving style high cornering speeds.

- you clearly brake or accelerate.

- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.

- ESP® is switched off.

- a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

ne an in 1 P4-00-2909-31

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the are in front of your vehicle by means of camera system ① at the top of the windshield.

Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.

If you select km in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Speed-/Odometer: function on computer (▷ page 262), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of e60km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes

▶ Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 261).

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagati backwards appear next to the vehicle in assistance display in the multifunction display.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can:

• give an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle
  • not give a warning or intervene
  There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

The system may be impaired or may not function if:

• there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray
• there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet)
• the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damage or covered, for instance by a sticker, in vicinity of the camera
• the radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e. obscured by snow
• there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work
• the lane markings are worn away, dark of covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
• the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
• the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
  • the road is narrow and winding
• there are strong shadows cast on the lan

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheel

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake application

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly /on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

WARNING

A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.

180 200 220 240 60 ①

P54.33-2293-31

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed.

This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognized as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.

In addition, a lane with lane markings on sides must be recognized.

In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected.

i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:

• you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
• you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
• you have switched on the turn signal.
• a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• you have adopted a sporty driving style high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
• ESP® is switched off.
  • the transmission is not in position D.
• a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire been detected and displayed.
• an obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:

• steer slightly in the opposite direction
- switch on the turn signal
- clearly brake or accelerate

A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:

• a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• lane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

Car dashboard interface with numbered annotation boxes highlighting a vehicle detection symbol

▶ Press button ②. Indicator lamp ① lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steerin intervention may be made.
▶ To switch off: press button ②. Indicator lamp ① goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The lane Keeping Assist Off message with appears in the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting

▶ Select the Active Lane Keeping Assist function in the Assistance menu e having the on-board computer (▷ page 262).
▶ Select the Standard or Adaptive setting. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

• you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
• a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

• you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
• a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP.

• you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

• you brake hard.

• you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
• you cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

• you approach the outer lane marking on a bend.
• the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
• the system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

• the road has narrow lanes.
- you cut the corner on a bend.

Useful information 248

Important safety notes 24

Displays and operation 24

Menus and submenus 25

Display messages 265

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 302

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident.

the For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (▷ page 33).

Displays and operation

Tachometer

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (▷ page 250).

Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.

Operating the on-board computer

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with labeled parts including speedometer, steering wheel, and key controls.

① Multifunction display
② Right control panel
③ Left control panel

▶ To activate the on-board computer: turn

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

- Calls up the main menu

Press briefly:

• Scrolls in lists
• Selects a menu or function
• In the Radio/Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects an audio track or video scene

- In the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number

	Press and hold:
	· Rapid scrolling in all lists· In the Radio/Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling· In the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open
	· In the Radio/Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources/media, confirms the list entry· In the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number
	Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
urn on	Press briefly:· Back· In the Radio/Media menu: deselects the track or station list or list of available radio sources/ media· Hiding display messages· Exits the telephone book/redial memory
nd g
	Press and hold:· Calls up the standard display in the TripTrip menu

Right control panel

- Mute

Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions

Multifunction display

16.5°C 123.0 km 26753 0 km/h 70% P54.33-2448-31

① Upper status bar with the following possible displays and indicator lamps: outside temperature (▷ page 248)

Turn signal, left (▷ page 140)

Low-beam headlamps (▷ page 139)

High-beam headlamps (▷ page 140)

Parking lamps and license plate lamp (▷ page 139)

Turn signal, right (▷ page 140)

② Display

③ Lower status bar with the following possible displays: Digital speed

ECO ECO start/stop function (▷ page 175)

HOLD HOLD function (▷ page 212)

P Active Parking Assist (▷ page 221)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist (▷ page 142)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (▷ page 143)

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist (▷ page 210) Additional speedometer (▷ page 263)

▶ To call up the menu list in display panel ②: press the button on the steering wheel. Display panel ② shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages.

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

Press the 📋 button on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (▷ page 249).

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:

• TripTrip menu (▷ page 250)
• NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions) (▷ page 252)
• RadioRadio menu (▷ page 254)
  • MediaMedia menu (▷ page 255)
• Telephone menu (▷ page 257)
• Assistance Info Display menu (▷ page 258)
  • Service menu (▷ page 259)
• Settings menu (▷ page 259)
  • AMG menu in AMG vehicles (▷ page 264)

Trip menu

Standard display

65.0 mi 26753 ① ② P54.33-2197-31

▶ Press and hold the ← button on steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer ① and odometer ② is shown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"

From Start 150 ml 2 1:30 h 26.4 mpg 3 60 mph 4 Trip P54.33-2198-31

① Distance
② Duration
③ Average fuel consumption
④ Average speed

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering see (▷ page 195). wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select From Start or From Reset.
gsee (▷ page 195).

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (▷ page 252).

The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if:

• the ignition has been switched off for more than four hours.
  • 999 hours have been exceeded.
  • 9,999 miles have been exceeded.

The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

theCO display

ECO Display 59% from Start Accel. Constant Coasting Trip P54.33-2199-31

The ECO display is not available for AMG vehicles.

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select ECO DisplayDisplay.

4p the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.

For further information on the ECO display,

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

Range 185 mi Consumption mpg Trip P54.33-2200-31

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select approximate range and the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles).

The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display show a vehicle being refueled instead of the range.

Digital speedometer

65 mph Trip P54.33-2201-31

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steerin wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the display are also reset. digital speedometer.
- ECO display
- display are also reset.

Resetting values

Reset Values? No Yes From Start P54.33-2202-31

Use □ on the steering wheel to call up vs the list of menus. Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the function that you wish to reset.
▶ Press the OK button.
▶ Press the ▼ button to select Yes and press the OK button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following functions:

• Trip odometer
• "From Start" trip computer

up"From Reset" trip computer

If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From start" trip computer are

galso reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the ECO

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions.

▶ Switch on COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Route guidance not active

Direction of Travel NE —① MERCEDES DRIVE —②

P54.33-2203-31

① Direction of travel
② Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

10mi 10:30h 900ft BENZ DRIVE

P54.33-2204-31

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

M5-E 1.2mi ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥

P54.33-2754-31

① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to the change of direction
③ Change-of-direction symbol
④ Lane not recommended (dark gray)
⑤ Possible lane (light gray)
⑥ Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white)

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended ④: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane.

Possible lane ⑤: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane only.

Recommended lane ⑥: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that.

① Distance to the next destination
② Estimated arrival time
③ Distance to the next change of direction
④ Current road

Change of direction without lane recommendation

① BENZ DRIVE 300ft ② 120 140 60 3 1 P54.33-2757-31

Other status indicators of the navigation system

Direction of destination Area of dest. reached P54.33-2752-31

① Road into which the change of direction ^① leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is to be made, will see symbol ③ for the change of direct

and distance graphic ②. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change

of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

① Additional information

Other possible additional information:

• New Route... or Calculating Route: a new route is being calculated.
• Road Not Mapped: the vehicle position is you. Inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. off-road position.
• No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination.
  • ☐: You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

Change of direction with lane recommendation

① BENZ DRIVE 2 300ft ③ 4 P54.33-2756-31

Radio menu ① FM/DAB Radio ② 3: SWR3 ③ Katzenjammer ④ I will dance (when I w... ⑤ Pop P54.33-2477-31

① Road into which the change of direction leads ①
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Change-of-direction symbol
④ Lane recommendation

① Waveband ② Station frequency with memory position
③ Name of artist
④ Name of track
⑤ Genre

Station ② is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ② if this has been stored.

▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Currently selected station ② appears in the multifunction display.

▶ To open the station list: press ▼ ▲ briefly.

▶ To select a station from the station list: press ▼ or ▲ briefly.

▶ To select a station from the station using rapid scrolling: press and briefly hold the ▼ or ▲ button.

▶ To select a waveband or station memory: press OK briefly.

▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the waveband or station memory.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

To store a station, see the separate operating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio.

For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions.

Media menu

Changing the media source

Media Memory Card DISC HDD USB P54.33-2207-31

You can change the media source and playback mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the MediaMedia menu.

▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering and wheel.

▶ To open/close the media sources list: press OK briefly.

The list shows the following media sources, for example:

• Disc (CD/DVD)
  • Memory card (SD/SDHC)
• MEDIA REGISTER
• USB storage device
• Bluetooth® audio device

Observe the additional information on supported media and on media mode; see the separate operating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audio media

Out Of Time 12: Radio Song R.E.M. Feat. KRS-One Out Of Time 5 06_wma_folder P54.33-2478-31

① Media source, e.g. name of current CD
② Current title
③ Name of artist
④ Name of album
⑤ Folder name

Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.

▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering ① Current scene wheel.

▶ To select audio player or audio media briefly press OK.

▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the corresponding audio player or audio media

▶ Press OK to confirm.

▶ To open the track list: press ▼ or ▲ briefly.

▶ To select next/previous track from the track list: briefly press ▼ or ▲. ▶To select DVD player or DVD media: briefly press OK.

▶ To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold ▼ or ▲ until the desired track is reached.

If you press and hold the ▼ or ▲ button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio drive or audio media, the multifunction display may display the following:

• track number
• track name
• artist
• album

The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

LEGEND_OF_ZORRO Scene 3 P54.33-2480-31

▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

The To select DVD player or DVD media: briefly press OK.

▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the corresponding DVD player or DVD media.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

▶ To open the scene list: press ▼ or You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: ▲ briefly.
▶ To select the next or previous scene• Phone READY or the name of the network from the scene list: briefly press ▼ provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.
▶ To select a scene from the scene list Phone No Service: there is no network using rapid scrolling: press and available or the mobile phone is searching hold ▼ or ▲ until desired scene ① for a network.

is reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

WARNING

If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.

▶ Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.

▶ Press ▼ or ▲ on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Accepting a call

Incoming call Moser, Rudi

P54.33-2481-31

▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the TelephoneTelephone menu, a display message in the multifunction display. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call.

Rejecting or ending a call

▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel.

If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still reject or end a call.

Dialing an entry from the phone book

Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
Press ▼ or ▲ on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Press the 📞 or OK button to start dialing.

▶ Press the ▼, ▲ or OK button to or switch to the phone book.

▶ To exit the redial memory: press the th or ← button.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select desired name.

or

▶ To begin rapid scrolling: press and how the ▼ or ▲ button for longer than one second.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

▶ If only one telephone number is stop for a name: press the 📞 or OK to start dialing.

or

▶ If there is more than one number for particular name: press the 📞 or button to display the numbers.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select number you want to dial.

▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to sta dialing.

or

▶ To exit the phone book: press the or ← button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory.

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press ▼ or ▲ on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

▶ Press the 📞 button to switch to the redial memory.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select desired name or number.

Assistance graphic menu 62°F OFF OFF 20 ft 200 ft 100 ft OK P54.33-2921-31

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the AssistanceAssista Info Display menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic.

▶ Press ▼ to display the ES ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.

The assistance graphic displays the status of up and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems:

e! ATTENTION ASSIST (▷ page 234)

• DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 207)

- Spotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (▷ page 262)

•Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 243)

• Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 240) the

- Distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (▷ page 73)

- PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 78)

Maintenance menu

Introduction

Tire Pressure ASSYST PLUS Coolant Service P54.33-22 10-31

In the Serv menu, you have the following options:

• Calling up display messages in message memory (▷ page 265)
• Checking the tire pressure electronically (▷ page 391)
• Calling up the service due date (▷ page 352)
• Displaying the coolant temperature (▷ page 259)

Displaying the coolant temperature

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to gases or other service products. There is risk of injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the Coolant submenu.
The coolant temperature is shown as a b display.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C).

Settings menu

Introduction

Lights Instrument Cluster Vehicle Factory Settings Settings P54.33-22 11-31

In the Settings menu, you have the following options:

• Changing assistance settings (▷ page 259)
• Changing the light settings (▷ page 262)
• Changing the instrument cluster settings (▷ page 262)

A display message is shown if the coolantRestoring the factory settings temperature is too high. (▷ page 263)

If the coolant temperature is over 248 °F(120 °C), do not continue driving. engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature is also shown digitally in the tachometer (▷ page 33).

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP (▷ page 76).

WARNING

If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP the following situations:

• when using snow chains
• in deep snow
• on sand or gravel

For further information about ESP see (▷ page 76).

▶ Start the engine.
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the

steering wheel to select the SettingsSetIf Night View Assist Plus automatic activation menu. is switched on, the night vision image is

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering automatically shown in the multifunction wheel. display if an object is detected.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the AssistanceAssistance submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select ESPESP.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
gautomatically shown in the multifunction display if an object is detected.
For further information about Night View Assist Plus (▷ page 238).
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

ESP® is deactivated if the OFF warning lamp steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings in the instrument cluster lights up menu.

continuously when the engine is running.

If the warning lamp lights up

continuously, ESP ^ is not available due to a▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the malfunction. DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.

Observe the information on warning lamps (▷ page 305).

Observe the information on display messages PRE-SAFE Brake. (▷ page 266).

Switching automatic activation of Night View Assist Plus on/off

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select Night View AssistAssist.
▶ Press OK to confirm. up The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.

If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation is switched on, the night vision image is

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the

mp steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select

PRE-SAFE Brake.

▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.

When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the Assistance Info Display menu in the multifunction display.

For more information on PRE-SAF Brake, see (▷ page 78).

Activating/deactivating the distance warning function

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select Distance WarningWarning.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.

When the distance warning function is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the Assistance Info Display menu in the multifunction display.

Further information on the distance warning function (▷ page 73).

Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Blind Spot Assist.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activate gray radar waves propagating backwards up appear next to the vehicle in the Assistance Info Display menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (▷ page 240).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSetting menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Attention Assist.

▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection is displayed.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Sensitive.

▶ Use OK to accept the setting.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the Assistance

Info Display menu in the multifunction display when the ignition is on.

For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (▷ page 234).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Lane Keeping Assist.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The current selection Standard or AdaptiveAdaptive is displayed.
▶ To change the setting: press OK again

For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (▷ page 243).

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off

This function is not available in Canada.

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the symbol in the multifunction display are shown in white.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime running lamps (▷ page 138).

Switching the spotlight function on or

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the SpotlightSpotlight function.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting When the spotlight function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the pedestrian symbol.

Further information on the spotlight function (▷ page 238).

Instrument cluster submenu

up

Selecting the unit of measurement for distance

The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.

▶ Use the on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.

Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
You will see the selected setting: km or milesmiles.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select ▶Press OK to confirm.

▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:

• Speedometer
  • Digital speedometer in the Trip menu

- Additional speedometer in the status areadigitally. on the multi-function display ▶ Use □

The unit in the additional speedometer is displayed inversely to the selected distance unit.

- Odometer and the trip odometer

- Trip computer

- Current consumption and the range

- Navigation instructions in the Navi menu

- Cruise control

- SPEEDTRONIC

• DISTRONIC PLUS

• ASSYST PLUS service interval display

▶Press OK to confirm. The current selection OutsideOutside Temperature or Coolant Temperature is displayed.

▶ To change the setting: press OK again.

Switching the additional speedometer on/off

Use the Additional Speedometer function to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display shows the speed

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSetting menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

▶ Use ▼ or ▲ to select the Additional Speedometer function. The current selection is displayed.

To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.

Selecting the permanent display function

Use the Permanent Display function to switch on the following displays in the status area of the multifunction display:

- outside temperature

- coolant temperature

▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Instrument Cluster submenu.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Permanent Display function.

Restoring the factory settings

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSetting menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Factory Settings submenu.

▶ Press OK to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears.

- Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select If the transmission fluid temperature is below No or Yes. - Press OK to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. 122 °F (50 °C), the symbol in oil temperature display ④ is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

1 75 mph 2 3 3↑UP 5 200 250 200 200 40 P54.33-2924-31

① Digital speedometer
② Gear indicator
③ Upshift indicator
④ Transmission fluid temperature
⑤ Engine oil temperature

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

Upshift indicator UP③ indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program.

Upshift indicator UP③ fades out other messages until you have shifted up.

If the engine oil temperature is below 176 °F (80 °C), the symbol in oil temperature display ⑤ is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.

If the transmission fluid temperature is below 122 °F (50 °C), the symbol in oil temperature display ④ is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.

SETUP

687 75 mph 3 ① M ON SPORT P54.33-2925-31

① Drive program (C/S/M)
② ESP® mode (ON/OFF)
③ Suspension tuning (SPORT/COMFORT)
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.

Display messages

Introduction

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual.

With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.

You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

• HOLD function (▷ page 212)
- Parking (▷ page 190)

Hiding display messages

▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:

▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
▶ Confirm by pressing OK on the steering wheel.

▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, you will see No Messages in the multifunction display. If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to scroll through the display messages.

Safety systems
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailableSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual	ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP Elecronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFEHOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and the adaptive brake lights are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE Brake, PRE-SAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.If the display message continues to be displayed:▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual	ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE Brake, PRE-SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.The [BRAKE] (USA only)/ [O] (Canada only), [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.[4042] WARNING
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	The brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if yo brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situ can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPs unable to stabilize the vehic There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Inoperative See Inoperative See Operator's Manual Operation's Manual	ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance are not available due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, PRE-SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPs unable to stabilize the vehic There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Currently Currently Unavailable See Unava Operator's Manual Ope

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance are not available due to a malfunction.

BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, PRE-SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.

The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

If ESP ^ is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

▶ Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

- Drive on carefully. - Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Inoperative See Inope Operator's Manual	EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ES BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance are not available due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE Brake, PRE-SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the [icon] and [icon] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPs unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PARK (USA only) [P] (Canada only)Please Release Please Parking Brake Parking Brake	The red PARK (USA only)/ [P] (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (▷ page 192).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.►Release the electric parking brake manually.
	The red PARK (USA only)/ [P] (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (▷ page 192).
PARK (USA only) [P] (Canada only)Parking Brake See Operator's Manual	The yellow [P] warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:►Switch the ignition off.►Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.►Shift the transmission to P.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The yellow (P) warning lamp and the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Release the electric parking brake manually.or►Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 192).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:►Do not drive on.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow (P) warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:►Do not drive on.►Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 408).►Shift the transmission to P.►Turn the front wheels towards the curb.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop.The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:▶ Shift the transmission to P.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:▶ Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 192)If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.▶ Shift the transmission to P.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARK (USA only) (P) (Canada only)Parking Brake Parking Brake Inoperative Inoperati	The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.▶ Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.▶ Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up and the red PARK (USA only)/ (E) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.▶ Shift the transmission to P.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARK (USAlony)(P) (Canada only)Turn On theIgnition toIgnition toRelease theRelease theParking BrakeParking Brake	The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.▶ Switch on the ignition.
(USAonly) (Canada only)Check Brake FluidLevelLevel	There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the BRAKE (USA only)/ (D) (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
Check Brake PadWearWear	The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
InoperativeInoperative	One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.▶ Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperativerOperator's ManualOperator's Manual	Important functions of PRE-SAFEPREhave failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Functions Currently LimitedSee Operator's See ManualManual	PRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.the system is outside the operating temperature range.the on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.PRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 190).Clean the sensors in the following locations (▶ page 358):in the radiator trimin the front bumperin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumperRestart the engine.
PRE-SAFE Functions Limited SeeLimited Operator's Manual	PRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is not available due to a malfunction BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Radar SensorsRadar SensorDirty SeeDirty SeeOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's Manual operators	At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily inoperative:PRE-SAFE® PLUSPRE-SAFE® BrakeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActive Lane Keeping AssistActive Blind Spot AssistDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes are:the sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.the function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Switch off the engine.Clean the sensors in the following locations (▷ page 358):in the radiator trimin the front bumperin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumperRestart the engine.The display message disappears.
Check Left RearBelt SeeBelt SeeOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's ManualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualoperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator’s manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's naturalOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manualOperator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator its manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's manual operator's standard operational warningIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Release the jamming.Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

WARNING

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compartment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt buckle extender may be jammed.

WARNING

If the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.

There is an increased risk of injury.

▶ Move the seat cushion forwards (▷ page 113) and remove the cause of the jamming.
▶ Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compartment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt may be locked.

WARNING

If the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.

There is an increased risk of injury.

▶ Completely take off your seat belt.
▶ Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compartment is not in the predefined position. There is not enough belt slack in the system.

WARNING

If the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.

There is an increased risk of injury.

▶ Loosen the seat belt.
▶ Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compartment is not in the predefined position. The assistance measures specified have been carried out. There is still a malfunction.

WARNING

If the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.

There is an increased risk of injury.

▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required	There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (▷ page 45).
Front LeftFront Left MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Front Right MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required	SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear LeftRear Left MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Rear Right MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required	SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear LeftRear Left MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredServ or Rear Right MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required	⚠ WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined po the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protectionThere is an increased risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Perform the specified assistance measures when display message Check Left Rear Belt See Operator's Manual or Check Right Rear Belt See Operator's Manual is shown (▷ page 274).If the display message does not disappear:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Rear CenterRear Center MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredServ	SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The warning also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service RequiredServ or Right Side Curtain Airbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredServ	There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be trigger unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Front PassengerFront The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even Airbag DisabledAirbag though

See Operator's See Operator's Manual Manual

• an adult or

- a person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

WARNING

The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
- Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.
▶ Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

• the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (▷ page 51).
• the display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display.

▶ Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

▶ Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (▶ page 51).
Front Passenger Front Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Operator's Manual	The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though:• a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seator• the front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.⚠ WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 190).▶ Switch the ignition off.▶ Open the front-passenger door.▶ Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.▶ Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.▶ Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.▶ Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:• the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (▶ page 51).• the display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display.
	▸ Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.▸ Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.▸ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (▷ page 51).

Lights

i Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Check LeftCheck Left Cornering Light or Check RightCheck Right Cornering Light	The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam	The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn SignalTurn Signal	The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn SignalTurn Signal	The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn SignalTurn Signal	The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp	The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Center Brake LampLamp	The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps	The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp	The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam	The left or right-hand high beam is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
License Plate Lamp	The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking LampParking Lamp	The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Backup LightBackup Light	The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp	The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
[2DX7]Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp	The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
[25HZ]Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check RightCheck Right Daytime RunningDaytime Running LightLight	The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active HeadlampsActive Headlamps InoperativeInoperative	The active light function is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction SeeMalfunction See Operator's ManualOperator's Manual	The exterior lighting is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
[ASC3]Auto Lamp Function InoperativeInoperative	The light sensor is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Switch Off Lights	The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. warning tone also sounds.▶Turn the light switch to AUTO.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Assist Inoperatively or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Assist Inoperatively	Adaptive Highbeam Assist or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus faulty.▶Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Assist Unavailable See Unavailable Operator's Manual or Adaptive Adaptive Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Plus Unavailable See Unavailable Operator's Manual or Adaptive Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available again is displayed.	Adaptive Highbeam Assist or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus deactivated and temporarily not operational. Possible causes the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.▶Clean the windshield.
	If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, d message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again is displayed.
	Adaptive Highbeam Assist or Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus operational again.

Engine

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's Manual	The coolant level is too low.⚠ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (▷ page 351).▶ If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
	The fan motor is faulty.▶ At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine OffEngine Off	The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.▶ Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.▶ Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.▶ If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C).
See Operator'sSee Operator's ManualManual	The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:a defective alternatora torn poly-V-belta malfunction in the electronics▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the e paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Open the hood.▶ Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling	The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 349).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 350).▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine otherwise be damaged.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)	The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 349).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 350).▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off	The oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Check the engine oil level (▷ page 349).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 350).
Fuel Level Low	The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station.
	There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
Gas Cap Loose	The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.▶ Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:▶ Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ATTENTION ASSIST:ATENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!	Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning to also sounds.► If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.
Attention Assist Attention Assist Inoperative Inoperative	ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle Rising Vehicle Rising	Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising Vehicle Rising Please Wait Please Wait	The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds.► Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
Stop Vehicle Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low	You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 190).► Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
	AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.► Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).► Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.► Listen for scraping sounds.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
MalfunctionMalfunction	The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.► Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABC MalfunctionABCMalfunctionStop VehicleStop Vehicle	The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears.
	The vehicle is leaking oil.The display message is shown continuously.► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	The display message is shown continuously.Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.► Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).► Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.► Listen for scraping sounds.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABC Vehicle Rising Please Wait Briefly	The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds.► Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
ABC MalfunctionABCMalfunctionMalfunction	The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.► Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative. Possible causes are:Currently CurrentlyUnavailable See Unavailable SeeOperator's Manual Operator's Manual	Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.the sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers a visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.there are no lane markings for a longer period.the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirtWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 190).Clean the windshield.Clean the sensors in the following locations:in the radiator trimin the front bumperin the rear bumper
Active Lane Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Inoperative	Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual	Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:the sensors are dirty.function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range.the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Clean the sensors (▷ page 358).Restart the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist InoperativeAssist InoperativeCanceled	Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park AssistPark Assist CanceledCanceled	The driver's door is open.Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed.
	You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
	The vehicle has started to skid and®T&R intervened.Use Active Parking Assist again later (▷ page 221).
Park AssistPark Assist InoperativeInoperative	PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (▷ page 221).If the display message continues to be displayed:Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.▶ Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the P symbol is not shown in the multifunction display):▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Night View Assist CurrentlyCurrently UnavailableUnavailable	Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:• the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.• the camera in the radiator trim is dirty.• visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.• the outside temperature is too high.▶ Clean the windshield.▶ Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside temperatures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has cooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.
Night View Assist InoperativeInoperative	Night View Assist Plus is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
SpotlightSpotlight InoperativeInoperative	Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:• the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.• the camera in the radiator trim is dirty.• visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.• the outside temperature is too high.▶ Clean the windshield.▶ Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside temperatures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has cooled down.If the system detects That the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.
	Night View Assist Plus is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
HOLDOffOff	The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Reactivate the HOLD function later (▷ page 212).
DISTRONIC PLUS Off	DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (▷ page 201).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailableAvailable	DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 201).
DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable Operator's ManualOperator's Manual	DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is also temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:• function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.• the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.• the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.• the system is outside the operating temperature range.• the on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (▷ page 358).▶ Restart the engine.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative Inoperative	DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:• BAS PLUS• PRE-SAFE® Brake• DISTRONIC PLUS Steering AssistA warning tone also sounds.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended Suspended	You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph	An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.▶ Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 201).
DTR+: Steering DTR+: Assist. Currently Assist Unavailable See Unavailable See Operator's Manual Operator's Manual	DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:• the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.• visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.• there are no lane markings for a longer period.• the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirtWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Clean the windshield.
DTR+: Steering DTR+: Assist.Assist.Inoperative Inoperative	DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

or snc

paying

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Cruise ControlCruise InoperativeInoperative	Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise ControlCruise - - - mph	A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.▶ If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.▶ Check the activation conditions for cruise control (▷ page 199).

Tires

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Check TireCheck TirePressure SoonPressure Soon	Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 365).Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (▷ page 394).
Check TireCheck TirePressure ThenPressure ThenRestart Run FlatIndicatorIndicator	Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (▷ page 394).
Run Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative	Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Please CorrectPleaseTire PressureTire Pressure	The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (▷ page 391).If necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 393).
Check TiresCheck Tire	The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 365).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 391).If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning TireWarning MalfunctionMalfunction	The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.⚠ WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.You could lose control of the vehicle.continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 365).
Tire Press.Tire PressMonitor CurrentlyMonitorUnavailable	Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.▶ Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.
TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) Missing	There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.▶ Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire PressureTirePraMonitorMonitorInoperative NoWheel Sensors	The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.▶Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.
Tire Press.Tire PressMonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative	The tire pressure monitor is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages		Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine		You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D.▶ Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary BatteryAUX MalfunctionMalfunction		The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'		You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Display messages		Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Transmission NotTrans in P Risk of Vehicle RollingVehicle Rolling Away Away		The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
Service RequiredServ Do Not Shift Gears Visit DealerVisit Dealer		You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:▶ Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.If transmission position R, N or P is selected:▶ Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is StationaryStationary		The vehicle is moving.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
		The trunk lid is open.▶ Close the trunk lid.
		The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Close the hood.
		At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Close all the doors.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
To view the ext.mirror, adjustmirror, front-passengerfront-passengerseat or remove thehead restraint.head	The front-passenger seat is in the chauffeur position and the head restraint is folded down.⚠ WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is the chauffeur position and the head restraint is folded down, the view of the front-passenger exterior mirror can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Remove the head restraint on the front-passenger seat (▷ page 119).or▶ Move the front-passenger seat into the normal position (▷ page 117).
Front-PassengerFrontPassengerSeat Cannot BeUsed Visit Workshop	The front-passenger seat head restraint is folded down and there is a malfunction. The head restraint can no longer be folded up.⚠ WARNINGIf head restraints are not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e. in the event of an accident or when braking.▶ Do not use the front-passenger seat.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Power SteeringPowerSteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunctionOperator's ManualOperator's Manual	The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.▶ If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a quali specialist workshop.▶ If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service	Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.▶ Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Check Washer Fluid	The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Add washer fluid (▷ page 351).

SmartKey

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Key Does NotBelong to Vehicle	You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.▶ Use the correct SmartKey.
Take Your Key fromIgnitionIgnition	The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.▶ Remove the SmartKey.
Obtain a New Key	The SmartKey needs to be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace Key Battery	The SmartKey batteries are discharged.▶ Change the batteries (▷ page 87).
Don't Forget Your KeyKey	The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.▶ Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Key Not Detected(white displaymessage)	The SmartKey is currently undetected.▶ Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.
Key Not Detected(red display message)	The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Locate the SmartKey.▶ Press OK on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
	Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).▶ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Remove 'Start' Button and Insert KeyKey	The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp	▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
	▷ After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 59).
	▷ After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 59).The warning tone ceases.
	▷ The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 59).The warning lamp goes out.There are objects on the front-passenger seat.▶Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.
	▷ The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 59).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

BRAKE (!)

▶ BRAKE (USA only), (①) (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristic may be affected.

There is a risk of an accident.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

BRAKE (1)

▶ BRAKE (USA only), (①) (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
▶ Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE, PRE-SAFE PLUS, PRE-SAFE Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance, for example, are also deactivated.

ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance, for example, are also unavailable.

ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake har for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP ^® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ BRAKE (USA only), ☑ (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the

yellow ESP ^® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running.

ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance, for example, are also unavailable.

ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake har for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP ^® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicatorlamp	▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
[KSK2]	▷ The yellow ESPwarning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.▶When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.▶Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.▶Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.▶Do not deactivate ESP.In rare cases (▷page 76), it may be best to deactivate ESP
	▷ The yellow ESPwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and crosswind driving assistance are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶Drive on carefully.▶Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
	▷ The yellow ESPOFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (▷page 76), it may be best to deactivate ESP▶Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:▶Drive on carefully.▶Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

Warning/indicatorlamp	▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
PARK (P)	▷ PARK (USA only), (P) (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the parking brake is lit.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
	▷ The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System).⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about SRS, see (▷ page 45).

Engine
Warning/indicatorlamp	▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
	▷ The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:in the engine managementin the fuel injection systemin the exhaust systemin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)in the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
	▷ The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Refuel at the nearest gas station.
	▷ The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the [IMAGE] Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the bar display.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is defective.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).

- Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocke or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 351).
▶ If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.
▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
▶ Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
- Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 °F (120 °C). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

WARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engi has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 351).
▶ If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.
▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. b snow, slush or ice.
▶ At coolant temperatures below 248 °F ( 120 °C ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
- Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.

▶ Increase the distance.

The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel too high a speed.

▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.

▶ Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on PRE-SAFEBrake (▷ page 78).

For further information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST: (▷ page 73).

Tires
Warning/indicatorlamp	▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
	▷ The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 365).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 391).If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
	▷ The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty. WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp

Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The power steering is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

▶ Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
▶ If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified special workshop.
▶ If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Useful information 316

Stowage areas 316

Features 322

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured (not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load:

• Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle byweight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.
• The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
• Position heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
• The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
  • Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
• Secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges, for protection.

Stowage space

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions.

• Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets.
- Close lockable stowage compartments while driving.
- Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 316)Eyeglasses compartment

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing numbered annotations for component identification.

▶ To open: pull handle ① and open glove flap ②.
▶ To close: fold glove box flap ② upwards until it engages.

The glove box can be cooled (▷ page 167).

The glove box contains a coin holder, a pen holder, three credit card holders and a holder for the COMAND remote control.

1 2 P68.00-6985-31

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a numbered component and a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the dashboard itself)

▶ To open: press marking ①.
The eyeglasses compartment opens downwards.
▶ To close: press marking ① again and e box eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartments in the center en console

① ② P68.00-6987-31

▶ To open: briefly press marking ②.
▶ To close: push stowage compartment ① in the direction of the arrow until it

engages.

▶ To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90^ clockwise to position 2.
▶ To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90^ counter-clockwise to position 1.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

Car interior control panel diagram with numbered annotations and directional arrows indicating motion or flow

st ① ② P68.00-6990-31

▶ To open: pull handle ① up and fold ld cover ② forwards.

▶ To open: press button ① or ② and fold the armrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a U port, an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio or video equipment, e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver's seat and front-passenger seat

WARNING

If you exceed the maximum load for the stowage compartment, the cover may not be able to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Never exceed the maximum permissible load for the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

Stowage compartments in the doors

SB are an 's 1 2 P68.00-7063-31

You can store items such as a rolled up fluorescent jacket and a small umbrella in stowage compartment ② in the doors.

In doors ① you can store bottles with a ry, capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:

▶ To open: fold down the seat armrest.
▶ Pull handle ① and fold the armrests upwards.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats:

▶ To open: fold down the seat armrest.
▶ Pull up on handle ① and fold the armrest upwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-compartment center console

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with individual seats and center console in the rear:

▶ Pull up on handle ① and fold the armrest upwards.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a L port, an AUX-IN jack, a mobile phone brac or a 115 V or 230 V socket are installed stowage compartment.

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

① ② P91.12-3623-31

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:

▶ To open: fold down the rear armrest.
▶ Pull handle ① and fold down cover ②.

st ① ② P91.12-3633-31

Vehicles with individual seats and center console in the rear:

▶ To open: fold down the rear armrest.
▶ Pull handle ① and fold down cover ②.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVD player is installed instead of a stowage compartment.

Folding table

WARNING

of the folding table is folded out while the vehicle is in motion, passengers can be thrown against it, particularly in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. There is a risk of injury.

Fold the folding table away before each journey.

① ② ③ P91.00-2314-31

▶ To fold out: open rear armrest ① (▷ page 319).
▶ Pull the folding table forwards and upwards there are four parcel net hooks in the trunk. by recess ② or ③ and swing outwards.
▶ Fold the table panels apart.
▶ To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table.

• Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners.
• Pad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular inset showing a central hole, no visible text or symbols.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

Under the trunk floor you can find a multi-purpose recess, e.g. for TREFIT.

Stowage nets

A stowage net is located in the front-passenger footwell and there are ruffled pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seats.

Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 316) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (▷ page 316).

① ② P68.00-7054-31

Securing cargo

Parcel net hooks

General notes

Observe the following notes on securing loads:

• Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
• Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.

▶ To open: open the trunk lid.
▶ Holding the ribbing, press handle ② downwards. Handle ② folds upwards.
▶ Swing trunk floor ① upwards using handle ② until it rests against the trunk partition.

Interior view of a car showing the hood and seat area with a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled '3' (no readable text or symbols)

▶ Fold out hook ③ on the underside of the trunk floor.

P68.00-7056-31

▶ Clip hook ③ into groove ④.
▶ To close: unclip hook ③ from groove
▶ Fasten hook ③ to the bracket on the underside of the trunk floor.
▶ Fold the trunk floor down.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

WARNING

When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open the trunk lid fully when the roof carrier is installed.

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation of instructions.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and a numbered marker, likely indicating movement or navigation.

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs (100 kg).

▶ Fold covers ① upwards in the direction the arrow.
▶ Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers ①.
▶ Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

! Only use the cup holders for containers the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the front-compartment center console

Interior view of a car dashboard with gear shift and mode dial (no visible text or symbols)

▶ To open: open the stowage compartment (▷ page 317).
▶ To remove: slide catch ① forwards and pull the cup holder upwards.
▶ To insert: make sure that the head unit cover is closed.
▶ Insert the cup holder and slide catch ① back.

You can remove the cup holder and the rubber mat for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.

@up holder in the rear seat armrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

of ① ② P68.00-6995-31

▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
▶ To open: press the front of cup holder ① or ②.
Cup holder ① or ② extends automatically.

▶ To fold out: place a container in the cup holder.

The cup holder folds down automatically.

▶ To fold in: remove the container.

The cup holder folds in automatically.

To close: slide cup holder ① or ② back until it engages.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift, showing two numbered views (1 and 2) of a mechanical component inside the dashboard.

▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
▶ To open: press down base ② of the cup holder in the middle until it engages.
▶ To close: press closing button ①. Base ② of cup holder pops up.

The cup holder insert can be removed for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

! Please do not pull out the cup holder insert any further than 15 mm. Otherwise, the wooden trim on the rear seat armrest could be damaged.

1 2 2 3 P68.00-6997:31

▶ To remove the insert: press down base ③ of the cup holder in the middle until it engages.
▶ Press both clips ② and pull the cup insert upwards approximately 15 mm.
▶ Press button ①. Base ③ of cup holder pops up.
▶ Remove the insert from the rear seat armrest completely.

! Make sure that the cup holder insert has been inserted into the recess correctly. Otherwise, the wooden trim on the rear seat armrest could be damaged.

1 2 3 up P68.00-6998-31

▶ To insert the insert: make sure that base ② of the cup holder is in the upp position.
▶ Place the cup holder insert into the rece in the rear seat armrest such that button ① is facing forwards.

Press the cup holder insert down.
▶ Press outer ring ③ of the cup holder insert, until the cup holder insert engages audibly.

Temperature controlled cup holder in the rear compartment

① ② P68.00.6999 32

① Cup holder
② Switch

The temperature-controlled cup holder can be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks warm.

When you use the warming function, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. ④ Vanity mirror ⑤ Mirror cover Therefore, do not touch the cup holder insert.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To switch on the cooling function: pMirror light ① only functions if the sun visor and hold button ② until the blue indicator clipped into bracket ② and mirror cover lamp on the button lights up. ⑤ has been folded up.
▶ To switch on the heating function: press and hold button ② until the red indicatoGlare from the side

lamp on the button lights up.

▶ To switch off the function: press and button ② until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Glare from the side

hold ng. the it.

Sun visors

Overview

WARNING

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be fold down additional sun visor ② to the blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an windshield accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to a device or system component

① Mirror light
② Bracket
③ Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

▶ Fold down sun visor ①.
▶ Pull sun visor ① out of bracket ③.
▶ Swing sun visor ① to the side.

Slide sun visor ① horizontally as required.

▶fold down additional sun visor ② to the an windshield.

Rear side window sunblinds

Diagram showing car interior with labeled compartments and a magnified inset highlighting four compartments with icons.

① Front left
② Front right

③ Rear right
④ Rear left

The sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows.

The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch each door for the corresponding side window

The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

▶ To close fully: pull the corresponding switch when the side window is closed.
▶ To open fully: press the corresponding switch.
You can use the switches on the rear doors to close the rear roller sunblinds the opposite side.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

WARNING

When extending or retracting, parts of the body could become trapped within the sweep of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

Extending/retracting from the driver's seat

Car interior screenshot with Mercedes-Benz logo and a digital icon showing a battery labeled '1' pointing to a plug.

▶ To extend or retract: briefly press button ①.

The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts.

To stop: briefly press button ① again.

The roller sunblind stops briefly and move back into the out-of-use position.

Extending/retracting from the rear

p ury. t e 1 P77.21-2330-31

▶ To extend: pull switch ① upwards and let go.

The roller sunblind extends fully.

▶ To stop extending: press switch ① downwards briefly.

The roller sunblind stops briefly and then retracts again.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged.

At temperatures below -4 °F (-20 °C) the roller sunblind cannot be operated.

▶ To retract: press switch ① beyond the point of resistance and let go. The roller sunblind retracts fully.
▶ To stop retracting: pull switch ① upwards. The roller sunblind stops briefly and then extends again.

When the override feature for the rear side windows is activated (▷ page 70), the switch cannot be operated. The roller sunblind can only be extended and retracted from the driver's seat.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

Diagram of car air intake system with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

▶ To open: briefly press marking ④. Stowage compartment ③ opens.
▶ To remove the insert: grip the sides insert ①, push it forward and pull it upwards ②.
▶ To re-install the insert: press insert into the drawer until it engages.
▶ To close: press stowage compartment closed until it locks.

Rear-compartment ashtray

① ② P68.00-7005-31

The ashtray is located in the stowage compartment in the rear door. To use it, you can place it in a cup holder or hold it in your hand.

▶ Remove the ashtray from retainer ① in the rear door.
▶ To open: fold lid ② upwards.
▶ To close: press lid ② downwards.

If you are not using the ashtray, close it and place it in the retainer in the rear door.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

WARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot of heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:

① • the hot cigarette lighter falls
• a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
③ objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compartment

Car dashboard interior with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating a directional change or movement

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To open: briefly press marking ③. Stowage compartment ② opens.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ①. Cigarette lighter ① will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: press stowage compartment ② closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter in the rear compartment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable rear seats

① ② P68.00-7001-31

Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the top. The compartment opens.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ①. Cigarette lighter ① will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: press cover ② closed until it locks.

① ② P68.00-7002-31

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment System:

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the top. The compartment opens.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ①. Cigarette lighter ① will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: press cover ② closed until it locks.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rSocket in the front-compartment center console

① ② P68.00-7102-31

▶ Press lid ① of the socket compartment briefly. The socket compartment opens.

▶ Press in cigarette lighter ②. Cigarette lighter ② will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

① ② ③ P68.00-7170-31

▶ To open: briefly press marking ③. Stowage compartment ① opens.

▶ Lift up the cover of socket ②.

▶ To close: press stowage compartment ① s closed until it locks.

12 V sockets

General notes

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.

An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. the on-board voltage is too low, the pow

to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the rear compartment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable rear seats

with en 12 V 2 P68.00.7047-31

Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System

▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the top. The compartment opens.

▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.

▶ To close: press cover ② closed until it locks.

① ② P68.00-7006-31

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment System:

▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the The compartment opens.
▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
▶ To close: press cover ② closed until it locks.

On vehicles with a 115 V socket, there is 12 V socket in the center console in the compartment.

Vehicles with individual seats in the

① ② P68.00-7007-31

▶ Press lid ① of the socket compartment briefly.

The socket compartment opens.

▶ Lift up the cover of socket ②.

Socket in the trunk

1 12 V MAX15 A P68.00-700B-31

▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①. top.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

DANGER

When a suitable device is connected, the 115 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

• Use only connector cables that are dry and free of damage.
• When the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry.
• Have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
• Never plug the connector cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

DANGER

If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 power socket should only be carried out qualified specialist personnel.

General notes

The 115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not consume more than maximum of 150 watts altogether.

Requirements for operation of these devices:

• the electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in.
• the plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket.
• the maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts.
• the on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range.
• the 12 V sockets in the center console the front compartment (▷ page 328) and the trunk are functional (▷ page 329).

Using the 115 V power socket

Diagram showing car air conditioner panel with labeled parts and warning symbol, including a magnified inset view of the component.

The 115 V socket is in the center console in the rear compartment on vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable rear seats.

▶ To switch on: switch the ignition on.
▶ Open flap ③.

▶Insert the plug of the electronic device into by15 V power socket ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up.

▶ To switch off: remove the connector from 115 V socket ①.

Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

a 1 2 3 P82.00-2913-31

The 115 V socket is in the armrest on vehicles with individual seats in the rear.

▶ Open the armrest (▷ page 319).
▶ To switch on: switch the ignition on.
▶ Open flap ③.
in Insert the plug of the electronic device into in 115 V power socket ①.

Indicator lamp ② lights up.

▶ To switch off: remove the connector from 115 V socket ①.

Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The warning lamp on the 115 V power socket is not lit.	The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too ▶ Start the engine.or ▶ Charge the battery (▷ page 371).If the indicator lamp still does not light up: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
	The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too ▶ Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V s ▶ Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down converter: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
	You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power. ▶ Connect a suitable electronic device.

Coolbox in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you cover the ventilation grille for the coolbox, it may overheat. There is a risk of Always make sure that the ventilation grille not covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in trunk.

The coolbox can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg).

If you want to store a bottle in the upper compartment of the coolbox, the capacity of the bottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).

Store only plastic bottles in the upper compartment of the coolbox.

Using the coolbox

fire. is the P91.12-3633-31

▶ Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold down the rear seat armrest.

Pull handle ① and fold down cover ②.

① ② P82.95-3001-31

▶ To open: pull handle ① on the cover.
▶ Fold the cover out to the front.
▶ To switch cooling level to low: presspurposes.

button ② once.

An indicator lamp in the button lights up

▶ To switch cooling level to high: press

button ② twice.

Both indicator lamps in the button light

▶ To switch off cooling: press button ② Close flap ①.

repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out. To install: swing flap ① to the side until it is locked in place by the magnets.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends the ambient temperature and the selected cooling level.

The coolbox reduces its cooling output or switches off, if:

• many electrical consumers are turned on
• the starter battery is not sufficiently charged

This is indicated by the flashing indicator lamps in the button. The cooling function v automatically switch back on as soon as th is sufficient voltage.

Caring for the coolbox

If you do not need to use the coolbox for extended period you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and a magnified view of a small object, likely illustrating a mechanical or electronic assembly.

You can remove the coolbox for maintenance

▶ To remove: switch off the coolbox.
▶ Pull plug ② down and out.
▶ Unscrew both screws ③.
▶ Pull out the coolbox.

▶ Close flap ①.

To install: swing flap ① to the side until it is locked in place by the magnets.

▶ Insert the coolbox.
▶ Tighten both screws ③.
▶ Connect plug ②.

mbrace

General notes

wimbrace is only available in the USA.

You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the i MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried an out, the system may not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will

be sent to you by mail. You can use this A malfunction in the system has been password to log onto the mbrace area undetected if one of the following occurs:

"Owners Online" at http://

www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if:

• it has been activated and is operational
• the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center

- a service subscription is available

• the starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle a map is only possible if:

• GPS reception is available.
- the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows:

▶ Press the + or - button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or

▶ Use the volume controller of COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g:

• Automatic and manual emergency call
• Roadside Assistance call
- MB Info call

You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.

• The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test.
• The indicator lamp in the 📄 Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
• The indicator lamp in the 📊 i MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
• The indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red on after the system self-diagnosis:
• SOS button
• 📞 Roadside Assistance call button
• i MB Info call button
  • After the system self-diagnosis, the Inoperative or Service Not ActivatedActivated message appears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notes

WARNING

It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in emergency if:

• you see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
• the vehicle is on a dangerous section of road
• the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the i MB Info call button. Any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

General notes

An emergency call is dialed automatically if means. an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered.

You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually.

As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message.

eThe audio output is muted.

Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example:

- Current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)

beVehicle identification number

n• Information on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer

doAssistance Center and the vehicle occupants.

- If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.

- If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.

This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other

Making an emergency call

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting a specific area of interest.

▶ To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover ① briefly to open
▶ Press SOS button ② briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ② flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
▶ Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
▶ After the emergency call, close cover ①.

If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

P82-08-2998-31

▶ Press Roadside Assistance button ①. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button ① flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCall ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunction display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:

- Current location of the vehicle - Vehicle identification number

The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (▷ page 339).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing.

Further details are available in your mbrace manual.

The system has not been able to initiate if a mobile phone network and GPS reception a roadside assistance call, if: are available, the system transfers data to the

- the indicator lamp for roadside assistance call button is flashing continuously. - no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phon network is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

▶ To end a call: press the multifunction steering wheel.

or

▶ Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on COMAND.

MB Info call button

P82-8-2999-31

▶ Press MB Info call button ①. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in MB Info call button ① flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display and COMAND is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCall ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunction display.

of a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:

- Current location of the vehicle

• Vehicle identification number

The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between button on the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.

You receive information about operating your

vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.

You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if:

- the indicator lamp in MB Info call button is flashing continuously.

- no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

▶ To end a call: press the 📞 button on s multifunction steering wheel.

or

▶ Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on COMAND.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an

emergency call will take priority and override network is available and data transfer is all other active calls. possible.

The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended.

An emergency call can only be terminated the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

• the button on the multifunction steering wheel
• or the corresponding COMAND button for ending a telephone call
  When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so on when the vehicle is stationary and in a s location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinations

Destination Download gives you access to a data bank with over 15 million Points of Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with "S up to four way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.

▶ Select Yes by turning (○) or sliding

←

the COMAND controller and pres

↓

to confirm.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.
The destination download function is available if the relevant mobile phone

i The destination download function can only be used if the vehicle is equipped with bya navigation system.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave only your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.

Search & Send

General notes

To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found can Google Maps® can be transferred via embrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address

▶ Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.
▶ To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website.
i Example:

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

▶ When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.
▶ Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up destination addresses

▶ Switch on the ignition.

The destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

▶ Select Yes by turning (◎) or sliding

←◎→ the COMAND controller and press section

to confirm.

The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.
i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they v sent.

If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:

If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote opening if have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available.

The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely.

▶ Contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

▶ Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:

- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" ss section

- the telephone application (e.g. iPhone Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible.

Vehicle remote closing

The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you were no longer nearby.

The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed remotely.

▶ Contact the following service hotlines:

you Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)

or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle at you switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoors

Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:

• the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
• the telephone application (e.g. iPhone Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection possible.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

▶ Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis

With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the

Customer Assistance center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance and center.

The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance center.

You will see the Roadside Assistance ConnectedConnected message in the COMAND If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Request for Vehicle Diagnosis Received Start vehicle diagnosis?diagnosis? message appears in the

▶ Confirm the message with Yes.
▶ When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please Start Ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ When the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position.position. message appears, follow the customer service representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.

ed You will see the Vehicle diagnosis s-activated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data.

(Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer.)

message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent.

▶ Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance center is terminated.

You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics: Transferring Data... message.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance center.

Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.

Further functions of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis include, for example:

- transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance center.

If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop.

- monthly status information e-mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. If applicable, you will receive information on special offers in the e-m This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehic (▷ page 28).

Information on Roadside Assistance (▷ page 24).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system.

A route can be prepared and sent either customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet.

Each route can include up to four way poi Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the TheThe external route has been saved to "Previous Destinations". Would you

like to start navigation? message. The route is saved to the hard disk.

▶ To start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in the display.

If you select No, the saved route can be called up later via the navigation menu.

▶ Select StartStart.

Route guidance is started.

Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND.

You can find further information in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you.

you can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.

The data you receive contains the following information:

• the location where the speed limit was exceeded
• the time at which the speed limit was exceeded
• the selected speed limit which was

exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will nds. informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options

include text message, e-mail or an automat Certain garage door drives are incompatible call. with the integrated garage door opener. If you

The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas have difficulty programming the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:

These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo. fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the pan alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards the alarm switches off.

• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

Canada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100

^0 HomeLink ^® hotline [phone] (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity (▷ page 26).

USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLin® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and g systems.

Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that:

• have safety stop and reverse features and
- meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

When programing a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programing.

important safety notes

WARNING

When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage door gate opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttons

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 341).

① ② ③ ④ ⑥ ⑤ PGB 2257-31

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror

Garage door remote control ⑤ is not included with the integrated garage door opener.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

▶ Select one of buttons ② to ④ to use control the garage door drive.

▶ To start programing mode: press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ of the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programing mode. After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.

▶ Release button ②, ③ or ④. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.

i Indicator lamp ① lights up yellow as so as button ②, ③ or ④ is programmed for first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp ① will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

▶ To program the remote control: point garage door remote control ⑤ towards buttons ② to ④ on the rear-view mirror a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm) ▶ Press and hold button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green. When indicator lamp ① lights up green: s" programing is finished.

When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programing was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

▶ Release button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

^t Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 341).

If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programing button on the door drive control panel. The programing button may be placed at different locations depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Get out of the vehicle.
▶ Press the programing button on the door drive unit.
i Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
▶ Get into the vehicle.
▶ Press previously programmed button ②, ③ or ④ of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programing was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

Release button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ of the garage door drive.

If indicator lamp ① blinks red: repeat the programing process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.

i The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Notes on programing the remote control

Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.

Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programing. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:

• if you live in Canada
• if you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps

▶ Press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ of the integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.

▶ Release the button. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ Press button ⑥ of garage door remote control ⑤ for two seconds, then release for two seconds.
▶ Press button ⑥ again for two seconds.
▶ Repeat this sequence on button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green.

When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programing is finished.

Problems when programing

If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions:

• Check the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control ⑤ and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. s The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units on which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz.
• Replace the batteries in garage door remote control ⑤. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control ⑤ will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the itrear-view mirror.

• When programing, hold remote control ⑤ at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programing. Try various angles at a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances.

• If another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programing steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control ⑤.

• Note that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends.
• Align the antenna cable of the garage opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp ① lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp ① flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp ① lights up yellow. Press button ②, ③ or ④ age if necessary.

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the To remove: pull the floormat off integrated garage door opener before selling retainers ②.

the vehicle.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press and hold buttons ② and ④. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.
▶ Release buttons ② and ④. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

1 1 1 2 P68.00-7009-31

airSlide the relevant seat back.

▶ To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
▶ Press studs ① onto retainers ②.
The To remove: pull the floormat off g retainers ②.
▶ Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

1 1 P67.10-2413-31

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz range.

In order to operate radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas ① on the windshield are permeable to radio waves. You can install radio-controlled devices in these areas.

These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.

Useful information 348

Engine compartment 348

ASSYST PLUS 352

Care 353

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the hood is unlatched, it may open up who the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

There is a risk of an accident.

Never unlatch the hood while driving.

WARNING

When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood.

Open and close the hood only when no one within its range of movement.

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the engine may compartment:

• switch off the ignition
• never reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area
• remove jewelry and watches
• keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts

WARNING

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury.

Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

WARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are Engine oil

not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and navigation pad, showing a location pin (no readable text or symbols)

▶ Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.
▶ Pull release lever ① on the hood. The hood is released.

Front view of a car with a highlighted internal component (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ② up and lift the hood.

Once you have lifted the hood about 15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically opened the rest of the way and held open by the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hood

▶ Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
▶ Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

General notes

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil pe 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.

When checking the oil level:

• park the vehicle on a level surface.
• the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine at normal operating temperature.
• if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

en 1 2 3 P18.00-2325-31

Example

▶ Pull oil dipstick ① out of the dipstick guide tube.
▶ Wipe off oil dipstick ①.
▶ Slowly slide oil dipstick ① into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark ③ and MAX mark ②, the oil level is correct.
▶ If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark ③ or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

WARNING

If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.

Environmental note

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center.

Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following:

• using engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system
• replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded
  • using engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

① P01.00-3370-31

Example

▶ Turn cap ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

▶ Replace cap ① on the filler neck and turn If clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

▶ Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (▷ page 349).

Further information on engine oil (▷ page 425).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down an touch only the components described in the following.

WARNING

The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by h coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injur Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape.

1 2 3 P20.30-2409-31

▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).

or

▶ Press Start/Stop button twice (▷ page 171).

▶ Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (▷ page 171) in the ignition lock.

▶ Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (▷ page 171).

Slowly turn cap ① half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape.

▶ Turn cap ① further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar ③ in the filler neck when cold, there is not enough coolant in coolant expansion y·tank ②.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 (1.5 cm) above marker bar ③ in the fill a neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ②.

▶ If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see (▷ page 426).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot

engine components or the exhaust system it engine oil level. Observe the notes on the could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. engine oil level (▷ page 349).

Make sure that no windshield washer The multifunction display shows a service concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.message for several seconds, e.g.:

Close-up of a car engine bay with a highlighted component (no visible text or symbols)

▶ To open: pull cap ① upwards by the
▶ Place cap ① on the edge of the filler and engage in place.
▶ Add the premixed washer fluid.
▶ To close: press cap ① onto the filler until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (▷ page 300).

Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (▷ page 427).

• Service A in .. Days
- Service A Due
• Service A Exceeded by .. Days

Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed.

The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service.

You can obtain further information from an ab authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is

ndisconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:

Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.

or

▶ After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

ASSYST PLUS

Service message

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.

Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet).

You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Hiding a service message

▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel.

Displaying service messages

▶ Switch the ignition on.
▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the

▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press OK to confirm. The service due date appears in the multifunction display.

Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements

The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:

• regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
• if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances
• use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
• if the engine is often left idling for long periods

Driving abroad

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

Environmental note

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following:

• dry, rough or hard cloths
  • abrasive cleaning agents
• solvents
• cleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

folMake sure that the key is at least 6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning paintwork

Automatic car wash

WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:

• when towing the vehicle
• in the car wash

- Operating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels.

- Operating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral:

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Operating with the SmartKey:

Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:

• the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.
• the ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed).
• the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.

Operating with the SmartKey:

Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake, if necessary.
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. Operating with the Start/Stop button:

! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk:

• using a car wash
  • using a power washer

▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Engage park position P.
▶ Release the brake pedal.

▶ Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake, if necessary.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country.

▶ Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
▶ Use a soft sponge to clean.
▶ Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.
▶ Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet.
▶ Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.
▶ Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.
▶ Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components.

Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.

!r Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

• tires
  • door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
  • electrical components
• battery
• connectors
• lights

seals

• trim
• ventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following ds situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk:

• using a car wash
  • using a power washer

Make sure that the key is at least 6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:

• stickers
• films
• magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.
▶ Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

▶ Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

▶ Use silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the p surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product us If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or the paint has become dull, the paint clean recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.

Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.

▶ Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:

- Vigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials.

- Frequent use of car washes.

- Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).

Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax or treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect

airetatment.

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.

The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.

Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly

after having cleaned the wheels with whee cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, and the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.
▶ Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms back aga s, before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the windows

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the window. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.

- Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.

cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage

e the plastic light lenses.

Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. the Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning of cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Diagram of a car front with labeled parts, showing numbered annotations for identification.

Front view of a Mercedes-Benz sedan with a blue accent line and numbered marker (1), no visible text or symbols on the car body.

▶ Clean sensors ① of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.

Side view of a car with a circular marker labeled '1' and an inset magnified view showing the blade (no text or symbols on the main subject)

▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶To open the cover of the rear view wen camera: with COMAND activated call up the vehicle menu: press the button.
▶ To switch to the menu bar: slide ↓ the controller.
▶ To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.
▶ To select Rear View Camera: turn and press the controller.
▶ To select Open Camera Cover: turn and press the controller. The rear view camera cover opens.
▶ To clean the rear view camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens ①.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the 360° camera with a power washer.360

n. area er 1 P54.00-2896-31

▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To open the cover of the 360° camera: with COMAND activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the 📄 button.
▶ To switch to the menu bar: slide ↓ the controller.
▶ To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

▶ To select the 360^ Camera: turn and press the controller.

▶ To select Open Camera Cover: turn and press the controller. The cover of the 360° camera opens.

▶ Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

▶ Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

▶ To clean the 360^ camera: clean camerary the display surface using a dry lens ① with clean water and a soft cloth. microfiber cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically.

Cleaning Night and Day View Assist

the Cleaning the camera behind the windshield

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.

▶ Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving d-systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

y ou st 1 uct 854.00-2906-31

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:

• alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
• abrasive cleaning agents
• commercially-available household cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.

▶ Fold down the camera cover by recess ①.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circled inset showing a numbered feature (no readable text or symbols)

▶ Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in front of camera ②.

Cleaning the camera in the radiator

Close-up of a car's front grille and dashboard with a magnified inset showing a component labeled '1' (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Camera lens ① is cleaned at regular interval by operating the windshield washer system.

▶ Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens ① when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

WARNING

Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:

• stickers
• films
  • scented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

trimWipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

▶ Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever

▶ Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

▶ Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes

! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:

• Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
• Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.
• Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:

• differences in the texture
• marks caused by growth and injury
- slight nuances of color

These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials

! Observe the following when cleaning:

• Clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
• Clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry

afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there.

- Clean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

WARNING

Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury.

Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 °F (80 °C) or in direct sunlight.

▶ Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

▶ Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brus or dry shampoo.

▶ Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Useful information 364

Where will I find...? 364

Flat tire 365

Battery (vehicle) 369

Jump-starting 373

Towing and tow-starting 376

Fuses 379

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor.

Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example:

• Jack
• Wheel chock
• Lug wrench
• Ratchet wrench
• Alignment bolt

Vehicles with a TREFIT kit

e ay ① ② ③ P58.10-2301-31

Example

① Tire sealant filler bottle
② Tire inflation compressor
③ Towing eye

▶ Open the trunk lid.
▶ Lift the trunk floor upwards (▷ page 320).
▶ Use the TREFIT kit (▷ page 366).

AMG vehicles

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P58.10-2322-31

Example

① Tire sealant filler bottle
② Jack
③ Ratchet
④ Alignment bolt
⑤ Jacking support
⑥ Socket
⑦ Lug wrench
⑧ Towing eye
⑨ Folding wheel chock
⑩ Tire inflation compressor

The tire-change tool kit is kept in a tray stowage well under the trunk floor.

▶ Open the trunk lid.
▶ Lift the trunk floor upwards (▷ page 320).

▶ that out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.
▶ Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

- MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (▷ page 365)

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires.

- a TREFIT kit (▷ page 364)

Information on changing/mounting a wheel (▷ page 407).

▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
▶ If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics now have status

1. This is the same as the SmartKey have been removed.

▶ Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (▷ page 171).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:

▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Speed

Make sure that they are not endangered they do so.

▶ Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed.

Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.

General notes

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the loadhearing capacity and the speed index (page 401).

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor.

If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:

• Observe the instructions in the display messages (▷ page 295).
• Check the tire for damage.

ving driving on, observe the following notes.

The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:

asRoad condition
- Outside temperature

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving

'conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving.

The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display.

You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: Important safety notes

• of the size specified for the vehicle and
- marked "MOExtended"

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

WARNING

When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

• you hear banging noises.
• the vehicle starts to shake.
• you see smoke and smell rubber.
• ESP® is intervening constantly.

• there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

TREFIT is a tire sealant.

You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C).

WARNING

In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:

• there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above.
  • the wheel rim is damaged.
• you have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:

• Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water.
• If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
• If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink

plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.

• Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant.
• If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P40.10-6340-31

Using the TREFIT kit

max.80 km/h max.50 mph Replace tyre without delay TIREFF! P40.10-6339-31

▶ Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
▶ Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage we underneath the trunk floor (▷ page 364).
▶ Affix part ① of the TREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision.
▶ Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near t valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

▶ Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the housing.
▶ Screw hose ⑤ onto flange ⑥ of tire sealant bottle ①.
▶ Place tire sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tire inflation compressor.

P40.10-6372-31

Remove the cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tire.
Screw filler hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
▶ Insert connector ④ into a 12 V socket (▷ page 328) in your vehicle.
▶Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Press on/off switch ③ on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.

▶ Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (▷ page 368).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (▶ page 368).

If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) not been attained after five minutes:

▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
▶ Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
▶ Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.826 psi).

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too bad damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a t pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

WARNING

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TREFIT kit.

Environmental note

Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes:

▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
bary ▶Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
▶ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.

▶ Pull away immediately.

▶ Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor.

The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

▶ Correct the tire pressure if it is still at 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in fuel filler flap for values.
▶ To increase the tire pressure: switch the tire inflation compressor.

9 10 P40.10-6341-31

▶ To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button ⑨ next to pressure gauge ⑩.
- When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the seale tire.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.
▶ Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor.

The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

▶ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.

▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.
▶ Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notes

Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:

• braking
• in the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
• braking
• in the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident. ed In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (▷ page 71) and (▷ page 76).

WARNING

Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk an explosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:

• by wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers
• due to friction between clothing and seats
• if you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
• if you wipe the battery with a cloth

Environmental note

Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

WARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion

- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.

- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.

- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the on.Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that:

• secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
• you switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged.
• you first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.

- the transmission is locked in position after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the ve The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.

Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard.

Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries have greater impact resistance and as a result there is no risk of acid burns to occupants when a battery is damaged in an accident.

Charging the battery

WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

WARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When

jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (▷ page 373).

▶ Open the hood.
▶ Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (▷ page 373).

Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean of the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a rise of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

WARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or space are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

• Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
• Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
• It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
• When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
• It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
• Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

WARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an expl Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do no light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may n charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points:

• The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
• You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
• Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
• Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
• Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
• If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connection for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
• Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

• the jumper cables are not damaged.
- when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
- the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

- Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.

▶ Shift the transmission to position P.

▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched off (▷ page 171). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ign lock and remove it (▷ page 171).

▶ Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.

▶ Open the hood.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and labeled features

Example: earth point cover

▶ Turn fasteners ① one 14 turn and remove.
▶ Remove the cover whilst pressing down on trim panel ② of the washer fluid reservoir.

Diagram of automotive battery wiring connections with numbered components and a magnified inset showing parts 3, 6, 7, and +.

Position number ⑧ identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jur starting device.

▶ Slide cover ⑦ of positive terminal ③ in the direction of the arrow.

- Connect positive terminal ③ on your vehicle to positive terminal ④ of donor battery ⑧ using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal ③ on your own vehicle first

▶ Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Connect negative terminal ⑤ of donor battery ⑧ to earth point ⑥ of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery ⑧ first.

▶ Start the engine.

▶ Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

▶ First, remove the jumper cables from earth point ⑥ and negative terminal ⑤, then from positive clamp ③ and positive terminal ④. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

▶ Close cover ⑦ of positive clamp ③ after removing the jumper cables.

▶ Replace the earth point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned precisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

▶ Press fasteners ① into the mountings until they engage.

▶ Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

WARNING

Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if:

• the engine is not running.
- the brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
- there is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.

WARNING

You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident.

Always switch off the ignition when towing vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

WARNING

If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or started is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle:

• the towing eye could detach itself
- the vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.

There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function the following or other similar situations:

• when towing the vehicle
• in the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 422).

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed.

If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

The battery must be connected and charged. Removing the towing eye

Otherwise, you:

• cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 the ignition lock
• cannot release the electric parking brake
• cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N

i Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (▷ page 92). could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

▶ Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Attach cover ① to the bumper and press until it engages.
▶ Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/° stowage tray.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the front, under covers ①.

▶ Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray (▷ page 364).
▶ Remove cover ① from the opening.
▶ Screw in and tighten the towing eye clockwise to the stop.

Ytowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised

Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised.

! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP could otherwise damage the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported.

▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 140).
▶ If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axle are raised, it is important that you observe the rear safety instructions (▷ page 376).

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground

It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (▷ page 376).

The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when tow the vehicle, you must observe the following points:

▶ You must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (▷ page 171).
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 140).
In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case only the indicator lamps for the direction travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

▶ Shift the automatic transmission to the position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the and ignition lock and remove it.
▶ Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported.

If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer.

In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (▷ page 373).

Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

Transporting the vehicle

You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it.

▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.
Information on "Jump-starting" (▷ page 373).

Fuses

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the if dashboard
• Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
• Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel
• Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart.

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box the trunk (▷ page 380).

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

^sted Dashboard fuse box

! In Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture emseeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

▶ Open the driver's door.

! Only use fuses that have been approved! for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

1 P82.00-2902-31

Before changing a fuse

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 190).
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched (▷ page 171).

or

▶ When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition and remove it (▷ page 171).

off

▶ To open: pull cover ① outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: clip in cover ① on the front of lockthe dashboard.
▶ Fold cover ① inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
▶ Open the front-passenger door.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted vehicle component (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Fold cover ① down and remove it.

the fit ure ① ② P72.12-2946-31

▶ To open: release retaining clamps ① and remove cover ②.

3 4 3 P54.15-3546-31

Fuse box in the engine compartment

WARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

▶ Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

▶ Undo screws ③ on the fuse box.

▶ Remove fuse box cover ④ forwards.

To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover ④.

▶ Insert cover ④ at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.

▶ Fold down cover ④ of the fuse box and tighten screws ③.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter fuse box when the cover is open.

▶ Insert cover ② and secure with retaining ureclamps ①.

! When closing the cover, make sure that is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistu

▶ Close the hood.

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair ▶ Close the hood. the operation of the fuses.

▶ Open the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

▶ Open the trunk lid.

① P54.15-3515-31

▶ To open: release cover ① at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object.

▶ Open cover ① downwards in the direction of the arrow.

The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart.

Engine emergency off

If the engine cannot be switched off as described, observe the following procedure:

▶ Take the fuse allocation chart from the fuse box in the trunk (▷ page 380).

▶ Search for “Emergency engine shutdown” in the fuse allocation chart.

▶ Remove the fuses listed under "Emergency engine shutdown".

Useful information 384

Important safety notes 384

Operation 384

Winter operation 386

Tire pressure 387

Loading the vehicle 395

All about wheels and tires 399

Changing a wheel 407

Wheel and tire combinations 413

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Important safety notes

WARNING

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are us the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.

Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct:

• designation
• model

When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct:

• designation
• manufacturer
• model

WARNING

A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

• do not drive with a flat tire.
• immediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

- pay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:

• suitability
• legal stipulations
  • factory recommendations

Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (page 413).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:

- on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (▷ page 395)

the• on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (▷ page 188)

• under "Tire pressure" (▷ page 387)

Operation

Information on driving

If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary.

While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. -If you find no signs of damage, have the tires

and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire

When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (▷ page 387).

the tires do not get deformed by the curb. The service life of tires depends, among other other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive things, on the following factors:

curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.

Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.

Y driving style

• tire pressure
• distance covered

Regular checking of wheels and tires

Important safety notes on the tire tread

WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

WARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:

• cuts in the tires
• punctures
• tears in the tires
• bulges on tires

- deformation or severe corrosion on wheelsthe legally prescribed limit for the minimum Regularly check the tire tread depth and the tire tread depth is reached.

condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (▷ page 385). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:

• Summer tires: 18 in (3 mm)
• M+S tires: 1 / 6 in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before

the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

dth spect ct t the e. ms, ①—TWI P40.10-6373-31

Bar indicator ① for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by you additionally equip your vehicle with a law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire TREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not tread. They are visible once a tread depth offearure run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. approximately 116 in (1.6 mm) has been A TREFIT kit can be obtained from a reached. If this is the case, the tire is so well qualified specialist workshop. that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires

- Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.

Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (▷ page 365).

• Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
• Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only re their full performance after this distance.
• Do not drive with tires which have too lit tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
• Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire press monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires wi a flat tire (▷ page 365).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that

Winter operation

General notes

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 407).

Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at every cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

WARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing the snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving

safety systems such as ABS and E\$P function optimally in winter. These tires have

been developed specifically for driving in snow.

Use M+S tires of the same make and tread all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.

Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.

When you have mounted M+S tires:

▶ Check the tire pressures (▷ page 390).
▶ Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 393).

Snow chains

WARNING

If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

• never install snow chains to the front wheels
• always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind:

• Snow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (▷ page 413).
• Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.

- Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate

regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

- On vehicles with AIRMATIC (▷ page 216) or Active Body Control (ABC) (▷ page 214), you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed.

You may wish to deactivate ESP® (▷ page 77) when pulling away with snow chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks:

• the tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
• the tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
• the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:

• monthly, at least
- if the load changes
• before beginning a long journey
• under different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire

pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes

The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory

Further information on tire pressures can be the tire pressure table contains the obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing Tire and Loading Information placard load and speed conditions.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE normal load 200 psi 35 psi maximum load 3.5 psi 4.2 psi Warm tires up to: + 4 psi A 212 584 00 15 P40.00-2229-31

Tire and Loading Information placard

TIRE LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENT SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES TO ALL 7 FRONT AVANT 2 MIDDLE MALEUR 3 REAR ARRIER 2 The combined weight of occupants and Le poids total des occupants et du chargers ege should never named XXX kg or XXX lbs.* entner droit jamais dépasser kg/oz Ibs. SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSIGNEMENTS TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID FRONT AVANT 255/40 ZK18 99Y XL 200 KPA, 29 PSI REAR ARRÈRE 285/35 ZK18 101Y XL 200 KPA, 29 PSI SPARSE DE SECOURS 175/55-18 95P 429 KPA, 60 PSI

P40.00-2223-31

① Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 395).

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

LUFTDRUCK PRESSURE PRESSION PRESIÓN für kalte Reifen for cold tires des pneus froids de Inflado 100 kPa = 1 bar A 169-584-5017 195/55 R16 215/45 R17 215/40 R18 Warme Reifer: +30 kPa +4 pi Pneus échauffes jusqu'à: Warm tres up to: Neuméticos calientes hasta: P40.00-2228-31

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

Liddruck für talle flées The pressure cold lines Pression des preus frist Pression deinfado 100 kPa = 1 bar R 18 R 19 bis up to 240 km/h jouquá 150 mph hasta Vorme Refen bis: Vormt fires up to: Windrefles: Windier line: micro river: neumáticos de inverno: Preus dchuffes jusqu'à neumáticos caleres hasta: + 30 kPa + 4 psi + 30 kPa + 4 psi A 212-594 02 17 L9007 P40.00-2230-31

Some tire pressure tables show only the diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.

R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire and can be found on the tire sidewall (▷ page 401).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:

im Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for size our vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board pad computer.

• if you want to drive with an increased level and/or
• if you want to drive at higher road spee
  The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

The tire temperature and pressure increase ds when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat a sudden loss of pressure.

For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

WARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

• Check the tire for foreign objects.
• Check whether the wheel is losing air or valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.

This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.

- if the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and

- if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 °F (10 °C), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when e checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires:

• on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

• overheat, leading to tire defects
• adversely affect handling
- wear excessively and/or unevenly

• have an adverse effect on fuel consumption page 387).

Overinflated tires

WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:

• increase the braking distance
• adversely affect handling
- wear excessively and/or unevenly
• have an adverse effect on ride comfort
- be more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

MAX. PERMISS. INFLAT. PRESS. 420 KPA ( 60 PSI ) the P40.10-6375-31

① Example: maximum permissible tire pressure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure

i(ənpage 387).

The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes

Observe the notes on tire pressure (▷ page 387).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:

• on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar
- on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap
• in the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:

▶ Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.
▶ Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

▶ Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard (▷ page 387).
▶ If the tire pressure is too low, increase the recommended value.
If the tire pressure is too high, release a by pressing down the metal pin in the va Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the t pressure gauge.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
▶ Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes

If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corre sensors are installed on all wheels.

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example).

36 36 40 40 [ psi ] P54.33-2368-31

For information on the message display, ref to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (▷ page 392).

Important safety notes

WARNING

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two

Weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard to the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (▷ page 387). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (▷ page 393). The current pressures are saved as new reference value. As a result, a warning message will appear the tire pressure drops significantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure ( page 387).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to wait you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights indicates whether a tire pressure is too low the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:

• if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
• if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction urdisplay.

Further information can be found on (▷ page 295).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.

The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electronically

▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call up up the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

▶ Press the OK button.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.

Press the OK button.

The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes minutes message appears.

After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels new sensors. As long as a clear allocation the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning messages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure driving situation on the Tire and Loading loss in one or more tires, a warning message information placard on the driver's side is shown in the multifunction display and the B-pillar (▷ page 387). yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on.

• If the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too and must be corrected at the next opportunity.
• If the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significant and the tires must be checked.
• If the Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (▷ page 295).

If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most of cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.

▶ Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading information placard on the driver's side the B-pillar (▷ page 387).
Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (▷ page 387).
lowMake sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Use 📋 on the steering wheel to call up tly the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.
▶ Press the OK button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select in Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes minutes message.
▶ Press the ▼ button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

▶ Press the OK button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After driving for a few minutes, the systel checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new t pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

▶ Press the ← button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only)

General notes

While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the sp of rotation of a wheel changes as a result, a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.

You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (▷ page 394).

Important safety notes

The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 387).

The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:

- snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires.

• road conditions are wintry.

• you are driving on sand or gravel.
• you adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration).
• you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

test Restart the tire pressure loss warning system ed if you have:

of • changed the tire pressure
- changed the wheels or tires
- mounted new wheels or tires

▶ Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions.

The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.

▶ Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (▷ page 387).

▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 171).
▶ Use □ on the steering wheel to call the list of menus.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceServ menu.
▶ Press the OK button.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

▶ Press the OK button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select YesYes.
▶ Press the OK button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

▶ Press the ← button. or
▶ If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the ▲ or ▼ button to select CancelCancel.
▶ Press the OK button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

WARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

① B-pillar, driver's side

Number of seats

TIRE ROADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENT SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY | TOTAL 7 FRONT 2 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT MILIEU ARRÈRE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. Le golds total des occupants et du chagement ne doit jamais dépasser kg ou XXX lbs. TIME PNEU SEE COLD TIRE PREISSURE DIMENSIONS PRISSION DES AVANT PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REPAR ARRÈRE VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSIGNEMENTS SPARE DE SÉCOURS 175/55-18 95P 429 KPA, 60 PSI

P40.00-2225-31

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

TIRE LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENT SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT 2 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE PLACES AUANT MILLE ARIÈRE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed xxx kg or xxx lbs. Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser TIRE SIZE COLO TIRE PRESSURE PNEU DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES AVANT PNEUS À FIOU SEE OWNER'S VOIR LE MANUEL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REPAR 255/40 ZR18 99Y XL 200 KPA, 29 PSI ARRIÈRE 285/35 ZR18 101Y XL 200 KPA, 29 PSI SPARE 175/35-18 95P 429 KPA, 60 PSI DE L'USAGER DE SECOURS POUR PLUS DE RENSIGNEMENTS

P40.00-2224-31

Maximum number of seats ① indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

▶ Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight ① is listed in the Tire and Load

Information placard: "The combined w of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.

The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

▶ Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.

▶ Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

▶ Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

▶ Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
▶ Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (▷ page 395).

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Step 1

	Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)	1500 lbs (680 kg)	1500 lbs (680 kg)	1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

	Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)	5 3 1
Distribution of the occupants	Front: 2Rear: 3	Front: 1Rear: 2	Front: 1
Weight of the occupants	Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)	Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)	Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)
Gross weight of all occupants	750 lbs (340 kg)	540 lbs (245 kg)	150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3

	Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load(maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)	1500 lbs (680 kg)-750 lbs (340 kg)750 lbs (340 kg)	1500 lbs (680 kg)=-540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)	1500 lbs (680 kg)-150 lbs (68 kg)=1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross a weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (▷ page 395).

Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards

TREADWEAR 240 TRACTION B TEMPERATURE A 1 2 3 P40.10-6376-31

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: ① tread wear grade, ② traction grade and ③ temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.

Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.

Example:

• Treadwear grade: 200
- Traction grade: AA
• Temperature grade: A

All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point. statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when te under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of 16 in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum still tread depth ( page 385). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires.

The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) ( page 386).

Temperature

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

The traction grades - from highest to lowest performance which all passenger car tires - are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum and concrete. A tire marked C may have pre-quired by law. traction performance.

Tire labeling

Overview

1 2 3 MANUFACTURER NOT HW AT AMCW TIRE NAME 225/65 #74-15 #4 P40.10-6382-31

① Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (▷ page 405)
② DOT, Tire Identification Number (▷ page 404)
③ Maximum tire load (▷ page 403)
④ Maximum tire pressure (▷ page 390)
⑤ Manufacturer
⑥ Tire material (▷ page 404)
⑦ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (▷ page 401)
⑧ Load index (▷ page 403)
⑨ Tire name

The markings described above are on the in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire burst. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

225 / 55 R 16 95 H ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P40.10-6378-31

① Tire width
② Nominal aspect ratio in %
③ Tire code
④ Rim diameter
⑤ Load bearing index
⑥ Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wa may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. tire manufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency.

Tire width: tire width ① shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.

Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ② is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.

Tire code: tire code ③ specifies the tire "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter ④ is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing index ⑤ is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 395).

Example:

Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (▷ page 403).

For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (▷ page 403).

Speed rating: speed rating ⑥ specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.

Summer tires

Index	Speed	rating
Q up to	100 mph	(160 km/h)
R up to	106 mph	(170 km/h)

by Index Speed rating

S up to type.	112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to	118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to	130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to in	149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to	168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to	186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up	to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)	over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over	149 mph (240 km/h)

- Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of load-bearing index ⑤ and speed rating ⑥.

- If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service in specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed.

If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification.

Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).

- The size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index	Speed	rating
Q	M+S1	up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T	M+S1	up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H	M+S1	up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V	M+S1	up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires.

In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the snowflake symbol on index ① may also be imprinted on the the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfil the requirements of the Rubber letter that identifies the speed rating Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the (▷ page 401).

Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph (210km/h).

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (▷ page 413).

Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Load index

225/55 R 16 95 H P40.10-6379-31

In addition to the load-bearing index, load index ① may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (▷ page 401).

- If no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire

- XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire

• Light Load: represents a light load tire

• C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the time can carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

be st ① MAX. LOADRATING 710 KG (1565 LBS) M P40.10-6380-31

Maximum tire load ① is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 395).

The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced i

1 DOT HW A7 3 4 AMCW 5 1600 P40.10-6381-31

The TIN is a unique identification number. TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.

The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ②, tire size ③, tire type code ④ and manufacturing date ⑤.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol ① marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ② provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires, see (▷ page 384).

Tire size: identifier ③ describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code ④ can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture ⑤ provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture.

For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

The SIDEWALL : 2 PUES POLYESTER PUE5 PUES UNDER TREAD : 2 PUES POLYESTER + 2 PUES STEEL + 1PLY NYION and P40.10-6377-31

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall ① and under tire tread ②.

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

fTire ply composition and material used

Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire Stread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure.

14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on 1 bar. the driver's side.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements the U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire trace and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressures

The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment

The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must not exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on t

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the other's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

• the curb weight of the vehicle
• the weight of the accessories

al the load limit
- the weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but do not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure

The tires are cold:

• if the vehicle has been parked without tires direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and
• if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. tire's

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a mode that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 116 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle their designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seat the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire

The "Breakdown assistance" section (▷ page 365) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information, driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (▷ page 365).

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center.

If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary (▷ page 393).

Rotating the wheels

WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may maintained. severely impair the driving characteristics if An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates the wheels or tires have different dimensions its correct direction of rotation.

The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is

Storing wheels

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.

Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 408).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Cleaning the wheels

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components.

Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced immediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and Fold both plates upwards ①.
level ground.
- Apply the electric parking brake manually.▶ Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into - Bring the front wheels into the straight- the openings in base plate ③.
and Fold both plates upwards ①.
▶ Fold out lower plate ②.
▶ Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate ③.

▶ Shift the transmission to position P.

▶ Make sure that "normal" level is selected for AIRMATIC (▷ page 216).

▶ Switch off the engine.

▶ Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

▶ Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (▷ page 171).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:

▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
- Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

Mechanical component with blue arrow and circled number 1, no visible text or symbols

Mechanical bracket with blue arrow indicating force or motion direction (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a black plastic component with blue arrows indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

Metal bracket component with mounting holes, labeled P40.10-6374-31 (no other text or symbols visible)

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (▷ page 364).

The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.

Side profile of a silver sedan car, no visible text or symbols

P40.10-6320-31

On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Side profile of a silver sedan car with visible suspension and front wheel (no text or symbols)

P40.10-6321-31

▶ On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Mechanical component with blue arrow indicating direction and circled number 1 (no text or symbols on the part itself)

Mechanical bracket with blue arrow indicating force or motion direction (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a black plastic component with blue arrows indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

Metal bracket component with mounting holes, labeled P40.10-6374-31 (no other text or symbols visible)

Raising the vehicle

WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

• make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
the never place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle.
• do not lie under the vehicle.
- do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- do not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised.
• make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively for

jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Vehicles with hub caps: the hub cap covers Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:

- to raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

- the jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

- avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.

- before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

- the jack must be placed on a firm, flat a non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.

- do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a numbered dial indicator (1) and partial text 'the old' visible on the side (no other readable text or symbols)

Vehicles with plastic hub caps:

▶ To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap ① counter-clockwise and remove.

▶ To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap ① is in the open position. To do so, turn the center cover counter-and-glockwise.

▶ Place hub cap ① in position and turn the center cover clockwise until you feel and hear hub cap ① engage.

- Make sure that hub cap ① is installed securely.

① ② ③ P40.10-6456-31

Vehicles with aluminum hub caps:

▶ To remove: take socket ② and lug wrench ③ from the vehicle tool kit (▷ page 364).
▶ Position socket ② on hub cap ①.
▶ Attach lug wrench ③ to socket ② and loosen hub cap ① counter-clockwise.
▶ Remove hub cap ①.
▶ To install: before installing, check hub cap ① and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary.
▶ Put hub cap ① in position and turn until is in the right position.
▶ Position socket ② on hub cap ①.
▶ Attach lug wrench ③ to socket ② and tighten hub cap ①.

The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 L (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Close-up of a car tire with a blue arrow indicating direction, labeled with number 3 (no text or symbols on the tire itself)

▶ Using lug wrench ③, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

Side view of a Mercedes-Benz sedan with two blue arrows indicating upward motion (no text or symbols on the car itself)

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows).

▶ Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers next to the jacking points on the outer sills.

lb-ft ④ P40.10-6439-31

▶ AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ④ upwards.

⑤ ⑥ ⑥ ⑦ P40.10-6440-31

▶ Position jack ⑥ at jacking point ⑤.

Mechanical linkage diagram showing two configurations with blue X marks, no text or symbols present

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking.

Close-up of a car tire mounted on a vehicle wheel, with a small bracket nearby (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
▶ Screw alignment bolt ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
▶ Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
▶ Remove the wheel.

▶ Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.
▶ Turn ratchet wrench ⑦ until jack ⑥ sits completely on jacking point ⑤ and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground
▶ Turn ratchet wrench ⑦ until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from ground.

Removing a wheel

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

Mounting a new wheel

WARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of the accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

d! WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and Lowering the vehicle

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 407).

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Close-up of a car wheel mounted on a lift, showing tire expansion and blue directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

▶ Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
▶ Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
▶ Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
▶ Unscrew the alignment bolt.

▶ Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingermounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
tight. Observe the recommended tire pressure

1 4 2 3 5 P40.10-6327-31

▶ Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.
▶ Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.
▶ Place the jack to one side.
▶ Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (① to ⑤). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft(150 Nm).
▶ Turn the jack back to its initial position.
▶ Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again.
▶ AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill.
▶ Check the tire pressure of the newly germounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 387).

i All mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitor.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted use with the control systems, such as A or ESP ^® , and are marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
- MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extende (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approv combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables:

• BA: both axles
• FA: front axle
• RA: rear axle

The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:

• on the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side
• in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions ( ≥ page 387).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment - always equip the vehicle with:

• tires of the same size on a given axle (left/ beenight)
• the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
  Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (▷ page 365).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are Id not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Ile It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist

i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.

On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras.

If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the

appropriate size. The size of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.

The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires

S 550

Summer tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtended

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtended

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)

RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtended

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+SMOExtended	BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+SMOExtendedRA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+SMOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+SMOExtendedRA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+SMOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

Winter tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S [IMAGE] BA: 8.0J x	18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S [IMAGE] MOExtended	BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S ⚠ MOExtended	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S ⚠ MOExtended	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

2 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951).
3 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951).

S 550 4MATIC

Summer tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2	Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtendedRA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtendedRA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL MOExtendedRA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL MOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+SMOExtended	BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

2 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951). 3 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+SMOExtendedRA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+SMOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+SMOExtendedRA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+SMOExtended	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

Winter tires

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S [IMAGE] BA: 8.0J x	18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S [IMAGE] MOExtended	BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S ⚙ MOExtended	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S ⚙ MOExtended	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

2 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951).
3 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package (code 951).

S 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tires

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) ^4XL RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) ^4,XL	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) ^4XL RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) ^4,XL	FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) ^6 XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) ^5 ,XL	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) ^6 XLRA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) ^5 ,XL	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tires

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S ^4	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S ^4	BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S6	BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S6	BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S6RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S5,6	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S6RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S5,6	FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Useful information 422

Information regarding technical data 422

Identification plates 422

Service products and filling capacities 423

Vehicle data 429

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 27).

Information regarding technical dat

The data stated here specifically refers a vehicle with standard equipment. Cons an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)

Interior view of a car showing the seat, steering wheel, and door panel (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate ①.

MFD BY DAIMLER AG STUTTGART IG LBS PASSENGER CAR C172 10/07 GVWR 4508 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE GAWR FRONT 2172 U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER GAWR REAR 1030 2403 AND THE T PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT WDDGF41X07F 123456 ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE MADE IN GERMANY This vehicle may include mercury-aided devices installed by the manufacier. • High Intensity Discharge Headamps • Expires • Back-Wt Instruments Removes Devices Before Vehicle Disposal. Upon Removal of Devices Please Reuse, Recycle or Dispose as Hazardous Waste. P00.01-4306-31

USA only

② VIN
③ Paint code

DAIMLER AG KG | MADE IN GERMANY GVWR/PNBV 2390 | BUILT 10/07 GAWR/DE F/AV 1200 | TYPE PC/VT GAWR/DE R/AR 1230 | PAINT CODE C172 WDBSK79F17F113822 ② ③ P00.01-4305-31

Canada only

② VIN
③ Paint code

The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

VIN

Interior view of a car showing a car's steering wheel and dashboard, with a magnified inset highlighting the wheel (no text or symbols present)

▶ Open the front right-hand door.
▶ Fold cover ① down and remove it. You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following locations:

• on the lower edge of the windshield (▷ page 423)
  • on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 422)

Engine number

Diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating a downward motion or flow direction.

① Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
② VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following ③ Emission control information plate, by the following including the certification of both federal inscription on the containers:
You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers:

Service products and filling capacities

Important safety notes

WARNING

Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger persons or the environment.

Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.

For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing.

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.

Environmental note

Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

• Fuels
• Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
• Coolant
• Brake fluid
  • Windshield washer fluid
  • Climate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.

MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fu vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

• Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
• If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
• If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
• Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity
AMG vehicles	20.6 US gal(78.0 l)
All other models	21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of which	reserve
AMG vehicles	Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)
All other models	Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with, a minimum octane rating of 91.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure.
! Do not use the following:

• E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)

• E100 (100% ethanol)

• M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)

• M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)

• M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)

• M100 (100% methanol)

• Gasoline with metalliferous additives

- Diesel

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see

"Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:

• Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
• Do not drive at the maximum speed.
• Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used.

You will usually find information about the grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Information on refueling (▷ page 188).

AMG vehicles

Additives

! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.

The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 423).

The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Missing values were not available at time going to print.

Model Engine	model	MB Approval
AMG vehicles	157 229.5
All other models	278 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.

Filling capacities

The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity
AMG vehicles	Without external oil cooler: 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
All other models	8.5 qt (8.0 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine. This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high visc this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin.

Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which

oSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

WARNING

Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point.

If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency.

You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Oll. Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

WARNING

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly

clean the antifreeze from components before accordance with

starting the engine.

MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked with every or maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

Filling capacities

Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, g even in countries where high temperatures prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

S Model Capacity
noAMG vehicles	12.6 US qt (11.5 l)
All other models	12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze.

The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks:

• corrosion protection
- antifreeze protection
- raising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35^ (-37 ^ ), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266^ (130 ^ ).

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:

• be at least 50%. This will protect the engi cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C).
• not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49^[-45^] ). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in

Washer fluid

Important safety notes

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid gine could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The

spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

At temperatures above freezing:

▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:

▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature.

• Down to 14 °F (-10 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water.
• Down to -4 °F (-20 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water.
• Down to -20.2 °F (-29 °C): mix 2 parts WinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washe fluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes

The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R-134a.

The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant.

Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All

applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included.

Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist ture workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

ture R-134a 550 ± 10g A 001 989 08 03 (PAG) DAIMLER AG SAE J639 A 246 817 15 20 P00.10-5318-31

Example: refrigerant instruction label

MB Warning symbol

② Refrigerant filling capacity
③ Applicable SAE standards
4 PAG oil part number
⑤ Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols ① indicate:

• possible dangers
  • having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

nt
Vehicles without rear-compartment air conditioning system	Capacity
G
Refrigerant	23.3 ± 0.4 oz(660 ± 10 g)
PAG oil	3.9 oz(110 g)
y
Vehicles with rear-compartment air conditioning system	Capacity
Refrigerant	27.1 ± 0.4 o(770 ± 10 g)
PAG oil	4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

• the heights specified may vary as a result of:
• tires
• load
• condition of the suspension
• optional equipment
• optional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

Dimensions and weights

Side profile of a sedan car with roof and trunk, showing front side height and side width (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Model ①① Opening height

S 63 AMG 4MATIC 70.8 in - 72.2 in(1799 mm -1834 mm)

All other models 71.0 in (1803 mm)

Short wheelbase models

All models
Vehicle length	201.4 in (5116 mm)
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	83.9 in (2130 mm)
Vehicle height	58.9 in (1496 mm)
Wheelbase	119.5 in (3035 mm)
Turning radius	39.0 ft (11.90 m)
Maximum roof load	220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk load	220 lb (100 kg)

Long wheelbase models

S 63 AMG 4MATIC
Vehicle length	208.1 in (5287 mm)
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	83.9 in (2130 mm)
Vehicle height	58.8 in - 60.1 in (1491 mm - 1526 mm)
Wheelbase	124.6 in (3165 mm)
Turning radius	40.5 ft (12.34 m)
Maximum roof load	220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk load	220 lb (100 kg)

All other models
Vehicle length	206.5 in (5246 mm)
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	83.9 in (2130 mm)
Vehicle height	58.8 in (1494 mm)
Wheelbase	124.6 in (3165 mm)
Turning radius	40.4 ft (12.30 m)
Maximum roof load	220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk load	220 lb (100 kg)